JP2022009786A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of favorably improving taste of a game.

SOLUTION: A main control device 60 executes win/failure determination processing on the basis of entry of a game ball in an operation hole, and determines whether or not to shift to an opening/closing execution mode. When a jackpot result that causes the shift to the opening/closing execution mode is produced, the main control device executes distribution determination processing to select a type of the jackpot result. As types of jackpot results, there are a low-probability jackpot result, an implicit high-probability jackpot result, an explicit high-probability jackpot result, an advantageous jackpot result A, an advantageous jackpot result B, and an advantageous jackpot result C. Among them, when the low-probability jackpot result is produced, a low probability mode starts after the opening/closing execution mode. However, when a jackpot result other than the low-probability jackpot result is produced, a high probability mode starts after the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the high probability mode is terminated when a reference termination number of game rounds are consumed, and there are a plurality of types of reference termination number of game rounds set therein.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. When the winning result is obtained, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-39323

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a first control means for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player.
When the privilege grant is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A second control means for executing an effect processing for executing an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, and
Equipped with
The first control means includes means for transmitting predetermined control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process.
The second control means is
The effect lottery execution means for executing the effect lottery process based on the reception of the predetermined control information, and the effect lottery execution means.
A means for executing the effect processing in a manner corresponding to the result of the effect lottery process so that the effect corresponding to the result of the effect lottery process can be executed.
Equipped with
The effect lottery execution means executes the effect lottery process so that a plurality of types of effect contents are subject to the lottery in the effect lottery process executed based on the specific predetermined control information.
The plurality of types of effect contents to be drawn in the effect lottery process executed based on the specific predetermined control information all include predetermined contents.
The first control means includes an external output means that outputs information corresponding to the predetermined control information to the outside of the gaming machine by using a predetermined terminal when a predetermined opportunity occurs.
The external output means includes means for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine by using the predetermined terminal when a specific trigger different from the predetermined trigger occurs.
While the predetermined control information includes information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the information corresponding to the predetermined control information output to the outside by the external output means is the privilege lottery process. The feature is that the information corresponding to the result of is not included.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) the hit / fail table for a low probability mode, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hit / miss table for a high probability mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the transition mode of the game state in the case of a hit result. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the display duration in a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the counter subtraction processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing in a sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing in the display side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table for a pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command output processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ending correspondence processing in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the display mode is drawn. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a mode in a sound light side MPU. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the outline of the electric structure of the game hall where a lot of pachinko machines are installed. It is a block diagram for demonstrating (a) the configuration for communication between a main control device, a hall computer and an external device, and the electrical configuration of an external device, and (b) the front surface of an external terminal board. It is a figure. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the external output processing at the time of the fluctuation start in the main MPU, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the command correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process for game rotation in an external MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the interlocking effect for game times executed by an external device. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of a bonus start in a main MPU, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the end of a bonus in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus effect control processing in an external MPU. It is a timing chart for explaining how the reproduction effect of a game time is performed by an external display device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the effect for predicting the end reference number of times of a high probability mode is performed by an external display device, and (b) the end reference of a high probability mode by a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the production for predicting the number of times is performed. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for having a communication between a main control device, a voice emission control device, a display control device, a hall computer and an external device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing in a sound light side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the display side command correspondence processing in a sound light side MPU, and (b) is a flowchart which shows the specific character effect control process in an external side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating how the effect using a specific character is performed in a symbol display device and an external display device. It is a flowchart which shows the external output process at the time of the fluctuation start executed by the main MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing in a sound light side MPU. It is a front view of the pachinko machine and the external device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the configuration for having a communication between a main control device, a voice emission control device, a hall computer and an external device. It is a flowchart which shows the command output processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the external control process in the external MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the effect pattern executed by the sound light side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the effect pattern executed by the sound light side MPU in 6th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as to be in a locked state. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the precision plate 55a described later on the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is equipped with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33 or a ball enters the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Will be executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, but the specific number of prize balls may be different from the above. The second operating port 34 may have a larger number of prize balls than the first operating port 33.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only is the ball discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first actuating port 33 and the second actuating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the normal electric power, the public electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed triggered by a prize in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, so that a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure hold display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 37a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display unit 37b.

About the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode described later, which shifts after winning a prize, etc. Is done.

The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), a pattern which is a kind of pattern consists of nine main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface 41a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface 41a. ..

When the symbol is variablely displayed on the display surface 41a based on the winning of the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. Further, when the variable display of the symbol ends, and if the result of the internal lottery is any of the low probability jackpot result and the advantageous jackpot result A to C described later, the same symbol is displayed on one of the effective lines. The combination is formed.

It should be noted that, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the game round 1 is until the predetermined result is displayed and ended. Equivalent to times. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 3, if a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Shift to open / close execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is colorless and transparently formed by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 has a main control board housed in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collective unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of a game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal board 79 in addition to the payout mechanism unit 73 and the control device collective unit 74. The external terminal board 79 is installed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 at the upper corner portion on the rotation base end side of the back pack unit 15. The external terminal board 79 outputs a predetermined signal in order to make the management computer of the game hall recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10, and is a substrate for inputting a predetermined signal from the management computer of the game hall to the pachinko machine 10. Is.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65.

Further, various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning portion corresponding to winning such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 determines the winning of each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 62, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 80 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 80. Details of these various commands will be described later. The MPU 62 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 80 by parallel communication.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 62, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. , The special figure unit 37 and the normal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a and a special figure hold display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map hold display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the MPU 62 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed in the MPU 62 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 62. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly shown, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38a is executed in the MPU 62. Further, when a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b is executed in the MPU 62. Then, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, or when the variable display is started in the normal figure display unit 38a, the display control of the normal figure hold display unit 38b is executed in the MPU 62.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60. Further, the power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 80 includes a voice emission control board 81 on which the MPU 82 is mounted. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A certain RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 82 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, and the like, based on the command received from the main control device 60. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

The MPU 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 90. The MPU 82 transmits to the display control device 90 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 60 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. The display control device 90 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 60 without going through the voice emission control device 80, and communicates with the voice emission control device 80 more than the voice emission control device 80 in relation to the main control device 60. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction.

The display control device 90 is a display control board 91 on which an MPU 92, which is an element in which a program ROM 93 and a work RAM 94 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 95, a character ROM 96, and a video RAM 97, respectively, are mounted. It is equipped with.

The MPU 92 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 80 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 95 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 95).

The program ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 92, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is.

The VDP95 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP95 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 95 adjusts the timings of the MPU 92, the video RAM 97, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 97 from the character ROM 96 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 96 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 96 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 97 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 97.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63 and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as a main side MPU 62, a main side ROM 63 and a main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the voice emission control device 80 are sound respectively. The optical side MPU 82, the sound light side ROM 83, and the sound light side RAM 84 are referred to, and the MPU 92, the program ROM 93, and the work RAM 94 of the display control device 90 are referred to as a display side MPU 92, a display side ROM 93, and a display side RAM 94, respectively.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 by bidirectional communication.

That is, the voice emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are electrically connected by using the first signal line group 101, and the sound light side MPU 82 is connected to the display side MPU 92 by using the first signal line group 101. A command is sent to. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the first signal line group 101 includes a signal line 102 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 103 for a clock signal for identification and a signal line 104 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

Further, the voice emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are electrically connected by using the second signal line group 111, and the display side MPU 92 is connected to the sound light side MPU 82 by using the second signal line group 111. A command is sent to. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 111 contains a signal line 112 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 113 for a clock signal for identification and a signal line 114 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

The first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one end of the first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 is aggregated, and a connector in which the other end is aggregated, and one connector is a voice emission control device. It is detachably attached to the connector of 80, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 90.

The communication method between the sound / light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Further, the first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, setting the display of the special figure display unit 37a, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, when the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for hit occurrence, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are displaced and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the variation type for determining the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. The counter CS is used. Further, it is decided to use the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34aa of the second operating port 34 is set to the general electric accessory open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the RAM 64 as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the hold storage area 64a.

The hold storage area 64a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is recorded in the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. At the same time, the combination of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second Each numerical information is stored in the order of the holding area RE2 → the third holding area RE3 → the fourth holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. ..

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a, and is the start of one game. At that time, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric utility opening counter C4 will be described. The general electric utility opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The general electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the general electric holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the utility accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored utility accessory opening counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of being in the open state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal-electricity open state in the general-purpose electric power opening lottery using the general-purpose electric goods opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose accessory 34a is opened when the general-purpose electric accessory 34a is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time is set longer. Has been done. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the general electric power is won and the open state of the public electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next public-electric open lottery to be held after one public-electric open lottery is performed (that is, the general-purpose map), compared to the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than that of the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be awarded to the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, in the general open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the open state. In addition, the secured time secured for the next Fuden opening lottery after one Fuden opening lottery is performed (for example, is executed by the Fuzu display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 64a of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The value of the winning random number is stored in the ROM 63 as a winning / failing table. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, as the hit / miss table, the hit / miss table for the low probability mode of FIG. 8A and the hit / miss table for the high probability mode of FIG. 8B are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, as shown in FIG. 8A, the values of the random numbers that win the big hit are two (for example, “5” and “305”. "). On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8B, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is the winning / failing for the low probability mode. It is set more than when the table is referenced, specifically 20 (eg, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220". , "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the high probability mode.

If the probability of winning a big hit is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and values of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low-probability mode, the big hit is won. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 in which the big hit is won in the high probability mode. ..

In both the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode, even if the big hit is not won in the winning / losing lottery, the small winning can be won. The jackpot winning can be a trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode and at least one of the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode, whereas the small hit winning can be a trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode. It does not trigger a transition for both the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode. That is, in the case of a big hit, at least one of the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode after the transition to the open / close execution mode may be different from the mode before the start of the open / close execution mode, whereas the small win is won. In this case, after the shift to the open / close execution mode, both the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode are the same as the modes before the start of the open / close execution mode.

In the gaming state where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. 8A, the number of random numbers that win the small hit is greater than the number of random numbers that win the big hit. Is also set a lot. Specifically, the value of the random number that wins the small hit is three (for example, "55", "355", "555"). On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. 8B, the number of random numbers that win the small hit is the value of the random number that wins the big hit. It is set more than the number, and the number of random numbers is set higher than when the hit / miss table for the low probability mode is referenced. Specifically, the value of the random number that wins the small hit is 5 (for example, "55", "205", "355", "455", "555").

In each lottery mode, the lottery result is out of order except for the value of the random number that wins the big hit and the value of the random number that wins the small hit. If the result is out of order, no transition will occur in all of the open / close execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode, and the support mode, triggered by the lottery result.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 64a of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

Here, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set in the pachinko machine 10, and each of these jackpot results includes (1) the content of the open / close execution mode, (2) the content of the win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and ( 3) At least one of the three contents, that is, the contents of the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, is different.

The open / close execution mode executed when a big hit is won is a round number regulation mode executed up to a predetermined number of round games. A round game is a game that continues until either the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. That is. Further, the number of round games executed in the round number specified mode is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

In the round number regulation mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high and low. And are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from the opening to the closing of the special electric winning device 32. There is. In detail, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.1 sec, which is shorter than the long time, are set. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. To. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode of the above-mentioned opening mode, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, and more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. ing. Therefore, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will be awarded the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and the time is short. When the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in the embodiment, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will not be awarded or even if a winning is generated, the number will be about one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game according to the long-time mode. That is, the special electric winning device 32 is opened 15 times according to the long-time mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short-time mode. That is, the special electric winning device 32 is opened 15 times in a short time mode.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above values and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

By the way, in the open / close execution mode executed when the small hit is won, the round game is not set, the open / close number of the special electric winning device 32 becomes the upper limit number, and the predetermined upper limit number of games. It is an open / close number regulation mode that is terminated based on the condition that either one of the conditions that the ball wins the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. In the open / close number specified mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened in a short time mode by the same number of times as the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed in the round number specified mode. That is, the special electric winning device 32 is opened 15 times in a short time mode. In this case, the upper limit of the end condition of the open / close number specified mode is set to 9. As already described, the opening duration according to the short-time mode is 0.1 sec, and the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 sec. Therefore, the total opening duration of the open / close number specified mode is the game ball. The time is set shorter than the product of the firing cycle and the upper limit number of open / close number specified modes. Therefore, in the open / close number specified mode, the round game is not executed, and whether or not the number is the upper limit is determined by the total number of winnings in the open / closed number specified mode. The probability that the opening and closing of will be executed increases.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 63 as a distribution table. As shown in FIG. 9, in the distribution table, as the distribution destinations of the types of jackpot results, the low probability jackpot result, the unspecified high accuracy jackpot result, the explicit high accuracy jackpot result, the advantageous jackpot result A, and The advantageous jackpot result B and the advantageous jackpot result C are set.

The transition mode of the gaming state when these big hit results are obtained will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description with reference to FIG. 10, a mode of transition of the gaming state when a small hit result is obtained will also be described.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. This low-probability mode results in a big hit next, and at least continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. In addition, the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of games reaches the end reference number of times for high-frequency (specifically 100 times) set as the number of games of 1 or more after the transition, and then the low-frequency support mode Move to. This infrequent support mode will result in a big hit next time, and will continue at least until it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until the number of games reaches the maximum number of end reference times (specifically, 70 times) set as the number of games of 1 or more after the transition, and then shifts to the low-probability mode. This low-probability mode results in a big hit next, and at least continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. In addition, the support mode will be the high frequency support mode if the mode before the transition to the open / close execution mode is the high frequency support mode, while it will be the low frequency support mode if the mode before the transition to the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode. The result. When the high-frequency support mode is set, the winning / losing lottery mode continues until the high-probability mode shifts to the low-probability mode. In addition, the low-frequency support mode results in a big hit next time, and at least continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. .. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the number of games reaches the maximum number of end reference times (specifically 70 times) set as the number of games of 1 or more after the transition, and then the low-probability mode and the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued. Move to low frequency support mode. These low-probability modes and low-frequency support modes will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until the transition to the open / close execution mode.

The advantageous jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the number of games reaches the shortest end reference number (specifically, 30 times) set as the number of games of 1 or more after the transition, and then the low-probability mode and the low-probability mode and Move to low frequency support mode. These low-probability modes and low-frequency support modes will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until the transition to the open / close execution mode.

The advantageous jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the number of games reaches the intermediate end reference number (specifically, 50 times) set as the number of games of 1 or more after the transition, and then the low-probability mode and the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued. Move to low frequency support mode. These low-probability modes and low-frequency support modes will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until the transition to the open / close execution mode.

The advantageous jackpot result C is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the number of games reaches the maximum number of end reference times (specifically 70 times) set as the number of games of 1 or more after the transition, and then the low-probability mode and the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued. Move to low frequency support mode. These low-probability modes and low-frequency support modes will result in a big hit next, and will continue at least until the transition to the open / close execution mode.

The small hit result is a game result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the open / close number specified mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, both the win / fail lottery mode and the support mode are maintained in the mode before the open / close execution mode shift. The win / fail lottery mode and the support mode will result in a big hit next time, and will continue at least until the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a short time mode. Is done. Further, in the small hit result, the mode shifts to the open / close number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed 15 times in a short time mode. That is, when any of the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and the small-hit result is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although the stop results different from each other are displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, the symbol display in which the display area is set larger than that of the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. In the device 41, the stop result is displayed in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a common symbol combination (for example, "3.4.1") on any of the effective lines.

In this case, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result and the small-hit result are in the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, and at least in the situation where the predetermined number of game times have not been digested after the open / close execution mode. If not, the mode of the effect in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is also a mode in which it is not possible to identify which game result is. As a result, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, when the open / close execution mode which becomes the low frequency winning mode or the open / close execution mode which becomes the open / close number specified mode occurs, the player can change the open / close execution mode. The game will be played while expecting that the mode will shift to the high probability mode after the end, and the interest of the game will be improved.

In the low probability jackpot result and the advantageous jackpot result A to C, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once according to the long-time mode. Will be done. That is, when either the low probability jackpot result or the advantageous jackpot result A to C is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode is apparently the same. Further, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although the stop results different from each other are displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, the symbol display in which the display area is set larger than that of the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. In the device 41, the stop result is displayed in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays the same combination of symbols on any of the effective lines. Further, the mode of the effect of the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 in the open / close execution mode when these game results are obtained is also an aspect in which it is not possible to identify which game result is. Further, when these game results are obtained, after the open / close execution mode, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode regardless of the type of the support mode before the open / close execution mode. As a result, when the open / close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs, the player plays the game while expecting to shift to the high-probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and ends for a longer time. The game will be played while expecting to shift to the high-probability mode of the standard number of times, and the interest of the game will be improved.

The end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode is set more in the case of the low probability jackpot result than in the case of the advantageous jackpot results A to C. As a result, even if the transition to the high probability mode does not occur even though the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode has occurred, the high frequency support mode is the longest, so if a low probability jackpot result is obtained. It is possible to suppress the disadvantageous feeling of the player.

In addition, when the result is an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result or an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result that shifts to the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the end reference number of times in the high-probability mode is the most advantageous advantageous jackpot result. The same number of times as in the case of A is selected. This makes it possible to increase the advantages of the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result and the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result.

In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 9, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 49", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" is not. Corresponds to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, "15-19" corresponds to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, "20-29" corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result A, and "30-39" corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result A. It corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result B, and "40 to 49" corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result C.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, reach a maximum value, and then return to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. In the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in the above is started, it means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the grant correspondence result. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in a symbol column is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface G to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in a part of the symbol rows. Therefore, in a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the big hit result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, or in the game times corresponding to the small hit result, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Is executed.

On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to display the advance notice is not performed by the main control device 60, but by the voice emission control device 80. In this case, in the voice emission control device 80, the game times corresponding to either the big hit result or the small hit result are more likely to generate the notice display and the appearance rate is higher than the game times corresponding to the missed result. The lottery process for displaying the notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that the low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the display duration on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display duration on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the special symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main MPU 62>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game on the main MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 62 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. In the following step S102, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 62 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / emission control device 78 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 64. Judge whether or not. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 64 is cleared as the initialization of the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is issued to the voice emission control device 80 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 62 will be described. The main control board 61 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further divided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 62. A peripheral circuit is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt process by the main MPU 62. .. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 62 at intervals of 4 msec cycle, which is a specific cycle. The main MPU 62 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of the pulse signal, and activates timer interrupt processing on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. And execute.

In this case, when the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 62, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt process will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 62, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 62 is next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing at the timing of 1 is set to absorb the portion exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In the following step S205, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 64.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are read, and the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are connected. Execute a process to specify the presence or absence of a ball.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle, as described above.

In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208. conduct.

In the following step S213, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special electric control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S214, the Fuzu Fuden control process is executed. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the numerical information of the Fuden accessory opening counter C4 is executed, and the numerical information is stored. In this case, an opening determination is made for the numerical information, and further, the opening determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing an effect for the ordinary drawing on the ordinary drawing display unit 38a. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information is set to reflect the increase / decrease number of the reserved information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure reservation display unit 37b, and the general case. The output information is set so that the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the figure display unit 38a is reflected in the normal figure hold display unit 38b. Further, in step S216, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display contents of the normal figure display unit 38a are set. Set the output information for updating.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S217, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the following step S218, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processes of steps S207 to S218 are executed, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring hold information is executed when a prize is awarded to the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34, and when the hold information is stored. A pass / fail judgment is made for the reserved information, and a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the hit / fail judgment as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the winning / failing determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect of playing the game is executed, and the process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S301, the pending information acquisition process is executed. In the acquisition process, when the game ball is won in the first operating port 33 or when the game ball is won in the second operating port 34, the holding area of the holding storage area 64a is held. When the number of reserved information stored in RE is read and the number of reserved information is less than the upper limit value (specifically, "4"), the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 Each value of is stored in the uppermost area of the holding area RE where the holding information is not stored.

In the acquisition process, when the hold information is acquired, the hold command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the hold command, the display-side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of hold information in the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold information. Further, when the number of hold information increases as described above, the display control process in step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) displays so that the display content is changed to correspond to the increase in the number of hold information. Control is done.

In the following step S302, the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 64 is read, and in step S303, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 63 is read. Then, in step S304, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

Here, the processing contents of steps S302 to S304 will be described.

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for the game round and a process for controlling the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the process for controlling the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (step S306), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the effect for the game round are to proceed. The special figure changing process (step S307), which is the process of the above, and the special figure finalizing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set.

Further, as the process for controlling the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (step S309), which is the process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 32. The special electric power opening process (step S310), the special electric power closing process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 32, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric termination process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state of the above, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change process (step S307). It is a start address, the start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determination process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start process (step S309). The start address is the start address, the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power opening process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closed process (step S311). It is a start address, and the start address SA6 is a start address of a program for executing the special electric end processing (step S312).

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter. The special figure special electric counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S304, in step S305, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure change start process in step S306, and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure change process in step S307. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the process of confirming the special figure in step S308, and if the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electric start process of step S309, and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the process of opening the special electric power in step S310, if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the process of closing the special electric power of step S311, and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric end processing of step S312. When any of the processes of steps S306 to S312 is executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S306 to S312 will be described individually.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing in step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 64a. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the special figure fluctuation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

In step S402, the data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process of shifting the data stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reserved area RE1 and the second. The data in each area is shifted such as the holding area RE2 → the first holding area RE1, the third holding area RE3 → the second holding area RE2, the fourth holding area RE4 → the third holding area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the voice emission control device 80 to recognize that the data in the hold area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

In the following step S403, the pass / fail determination process is executed. In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 63 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, the hit / fail determination information, that is, the winning random number counter C1 is obtained. It is determined whether or not the numerical information obtained matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is used for the low probability by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63. It is judged whether or not it matches with the jackpot numerical information of.

In the following step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S403 is the jackpot winning result. If it is a big hit winning result, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 63, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped above. Specifically, it is specified which of the low-accuracy jackpot result, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result, the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and the advantageous jackpot result A to C corresponds to the jackpot result.

In the following step S406, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance from the stop result table for the jackpot result. It is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. In the stop result table for the big hit result, the information of the mode of the picture stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the big hit result.

The information on the type of the pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the mode of the pattern may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

In the following step S407, the flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 64 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S405 is used. Set "1" to the corresponding flag.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not a big hit winning result, it is determined in step S408 whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S403 is a small hit result. If it is a small hit result, the stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed in step S409. Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in this game is specified from the stop result table for the small hit result stored in advance in the main ROM 63. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result. In the following step S410, "1" is set in the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S408, the stop result setting process for the disengagement result is executed in step S411. Specifically, the stop result table for the deviation result, which is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, is the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game times corresponding to the start of the fluctuation this time. The identified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the aspect of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the big hit result and the information on the aspect of the pattern selected in the case of the small hit result.

After executing any of the processes of step S407, step S410, and step S411, the display duration acquisition process is executed in step S412. The acquisition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not both the high probability counter and the high frequency counter provided in the main RAM 64 are 1 or more. The high-probability counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in the high-probability mode on the main MPU 62. Will be done. In addition, the high-probability counter is set with data corresponding to the end reference number of times for high probability when the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result ends, and every time the game round ends, the end for high probability The data is updated so that the reference number is subtracted by 1. Then, when the end reference number of times for high probability becomes "0", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The high-frequency counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode on the main MPU 62. The process is executed. In addition, the high frequency counter is set with data corresponding to the end reference number of times for high frequency when the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result ends, and every time the game round ends, the end for high frequency The data is updated so that the reference number is subtracted by 1. Then, when the end reference number of times for high frequency becomes "0", the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, the first table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S502. The first table is table data in which a plurality of types of display durations of game times in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are defined. After that, in step S503, the value of the variable type counter CS is acquired, the number of reserved information stored in the reserved storage area 64a is read out, and various lottery results are grasped. As for grasping the results of these various lottery, the content of whether the result of the winning or losing lottery is a big hit result, a small hit result, or a missed result, and in the case of a big hit result, what kind of the big hit result is. And in the case of a deviation result, the content of whether or not to generate a reach display is included. In addition, when deciding whether or not to generate the reach display in the case of the deviation result, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is referred to among the pending information that triggered the execution of the game round this time. In the following step S504, the display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read from the first table and set as the display duration of the current game round. After that, the acquisition process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the second table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S506. The second table is table data in which a plurality of types of display durations of game times in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are defined. After that, in step S503, the value of the variable type counter CS is acquired, the number of reserved information stored in the reserved storage area 64a is read out, and various lottery results are grasped. In the following step S504, the display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read from the second table and set as the display duration of the current game round. After that, the acquisition process is terminated.

In the first table and the second table, it is easier to select a shorter display duration than when other tables for the display duration are referred to. Specifically, when the game times this time correspond to any of the big hit result, the small hit result, and the out-of-reach display, the display duration corresponding to each is selected. On the other hand, in the game times that result in the loss that the reach display does not occur, if the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is one or more, the game times that result in the loss that the reach display does not occur are displayed. Display duration shorter than the average display duration when other tables for duration are referenced and the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is 3 or 4 ( For example, 2 sec or 3 sec) is selected, and even if the hold information is not stored in the hold area RE, the reach display does not occur and the other table for the display duration is referred to in the game times that result in an outlier. A display duration (for example, 6 sec or 7 sec) shorter than the display duration selected when the hold information is not stored in the hold area RE is selected. By selecting the display duration as described above, in the situation of high frequency support mode, it is possible to digest the game times in a short time, and the time required until the next jackpot result occurs is shortened. It becomes possible.

Further, the display duration selected when the reach display occurs is different between the first table and the second table, or the display duration which is easy to be selected when the reach display occurs is different. Specifically, in the case of the first table, a longer display duration is generated when the reach display occurs so that the reach display of the content having a high expectation of a big hit result is more likely to occur in the case of the second table. Is easier to select. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach display is generated so that the reach display of the content having a high expectation of a big hit result is more likely to occur in the case of the second table than in the case of the first table. In some cases, a configuration in which a long display duration can be easily selected may be used.

If a negative determination is made in step S505, it is determined in step S507 whether or not any of the high-probability counter and the small hit-after counter provided in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. The small hit post-counter is a counter for specifying by the MPU 62 whether or not the game times of the standard number of small hits after the small hit result has already been digested. The small hit post-counter is set with data corresponding to the number of small hit post-use reference times when the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result ends, and each time the game round ends, the small hit post-use reference. The data is updated so that the number of times is subtracted by 1. Further, when the open / close execution mode is changed, the value of the counter after a small hit is cleared to "0". In step S507, the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are used, or the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are used, and after the small hit result, the standard number of game times after the small hit is exhausted. Make an affirmative judgment when the situation is not completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S507, the third table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S508. The third table shows the situation where the high probability mode is the low frequency support mode, and the low probability mode is the low frequency support mode, and after the small hit result, the digestion of the standard number of games after the small hit is completed. It is table data in which multiple types of display durations of game times are defined in a situation where the game times are not displayed. After that, as described above in step S503, the value of the variable type counter CS is acquired, the number of hold information stored in the hold storage area 64a is read, and various lottery results are grasped, and in step S504. , The display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read from the third table and set as the display duration of the current game. After that, the acquisition process is terminated.

In either the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, or the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode in which the digestion of the standard number of game times after the small hit is not completed after the small hit result. Also, by referring to the common third table, the selection of the display duration of the game times will be made in a common manner in these situations. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to identify which of these situations is from the aspect of the game times, and the player plays the game while expecting that the player is in the high probability mode in the situation. Will do. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

If a negative determination is made in step S507, another table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S509. After that, as described above in step S503, the value of the variable type counter CS is acquired, the number of hold information stored in the hold storage area 64a is read, and various lottery results are grasped, and in step S504. , The display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read from other tables and set as the display duration of the current game. After that, the acquisition process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 14), after executing the display duration acquisition process in step S412, the process proceeds to step S413, and the display duration information acquired in step S412 is specified. Figure Set to the special electric timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 12) already described. By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the special symbol display unit 37a and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the variable display is performed. The final stop is displayed over the final stop time in a state where the stop result of is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line). In this case, the display duration acquired in step S412 is the time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game.

In the following step S414, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The variable command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / miss judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and display duration. It contains the corresponding data. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that the command itself is a variable command is set by the data of the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the hit / fail determination process is performed by the data of the next 4 bits. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the time data corresponding to the display duration is set from the remaining 8-bit data. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the variation command, it recognizes that it is the variation command from the identification data, and obtains the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. Recognize and recognize the display duration of this game time from the above time data. Here, since the main MPU 62 selects a display duration that differs depending on whether or not reach occurs, even if the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound and light side MPU 82 displays the information. It is possible to identify the presence or absence of reach from the duration information. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and the rest of the high probability mode. It contains data corresponding to the number of continuations and the number of remaining continuations of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that the command is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2 bytes of data, and the hit / fail determination process and the hit / fail determination process are performed by the next 4 bits of data. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data corresponds to the remaining number of continuations in the high probability mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode. Is set. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. , The remaining number of continuations in the high probability mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode are recognized from the data for the number of continuations.

Here, both the variable command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the hit / miss determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, in the sound / light side MPU 82, by collating the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, noise or the like may be generated regarding the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to identify whether or not a communication error has occurred. Then, when both lottery result data match, control for production corresponding to the contents of the variable command and the type command is executed, and when both lottery result data do not match. Can notify it. By the way, in the latter case, the sound / light side MPU 82 may execute the game turn effect corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game turn. For example, in the game turn effect, the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination may be performed. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol display device 41 may stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation. In this case, the game rotation effect may be performed over the display duration corresponding to the time data included in the change command, or may be continued until the next change command and type command are received. May be good.

After the process of step S414 is executed, the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is started in step S415. In the following step S416, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step S416 is executed. ". After that, after executing the external output process at the start of the fluctuation in step S417, the present special figure fluctuation start process is terminated. The contents of the external output processing at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Processing during special figure change>
Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special figure change processing, it is determined whether or not the timing is before the final stop display during the duration of the game round, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Execute the process to change it regularly. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. In addition, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not a reach display occurs.

In addition, instead of waiting in the process of changing the special figure until the timing to display the final stop, if it is not the timing to display the final stop, after executing the process for changing regularly, this special figure End the variable processing. Therefore, after the effect for the game round is started, the special figure changing process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the final stop display timing is reached. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, the symbol display device 41 sends a final stop command to the sound / light side MPU 82 in order to display the stop result of this game round as the final stop, and a special drawing. The display mode of the pattern on the display unit 37a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game times. Further, the information of the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game round is read from the main ROM 63 and set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the process during special figure determination in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the final stop time of the current game round has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the processing during determination of this special figure is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the external output process at the end of the fluctuation is executed. The details of the processing will be described later. After that, in step S603, the counter subtraction process is executed. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the counter subtraction process.

In the counter subtraction process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the value of the high probability counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S701, the value of the high probability counter is subtracted by 1 in step S702, and it is determined in step S703 whether or not the value of the high probability counter after the subtraction is "0". do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, "1" is set in the high probability end flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S704. The high-probability end flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S701 or step S703, or when the process of step S704 is executed, it is determined in step S705 whether or not the value of the high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. do. If a negative determination is made in step S705, the counter subtraction process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the value of the high frequency counter is subtracted by 1 in step S706, and it is determined in step S707 whether or not the value of the high frequency counter after the subtraction is "0". do. If a negative determination is made in step S707, the counter subtraction process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, "1" is set in the high frequency end flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S708. The high-frequency end flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), after executing the counter subtraction process in step S603, in step S604, the result of the winning / failing determination that triggered the current game round is the big hit result or the small. Judge whether it is a hit result or not.

If a negative determination is made in step S604, the mode transition process is executed in step S605. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the mode transition process.

In the mode transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in both the high probability end flag and the high frequency end flag of the main RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, an end command in the explicit high accuracy state is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in step S802. As a result, in the sound / light side MPU 82, it is possible to specify that the state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode has ended, and it is possible to make the content of the effect correspond to it. In the following step S803, the external output setting process at the end of the explicit high accuracy state is executed. The processing content of the external output setting processing will be described later. Then, in step S804, after clearing both the high-probability end flag and the high-frequency end flag of the main RAM 64 to "0", the mode transition process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S805 whether or not "1" is set in the high probability end flag of the main RAM 64. When an affirmative determination is made in step S805, it means that the state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode ends, and the state shifts to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. .. In this case, in step S806, the high probability end flag is cleared to "0", and then the mode transition process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S805, it is determined in step S807 whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency end flag of the main RAM 64. If a negative determination is made in step S807, the mode transition process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are terminated. It means that the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S808.

In step S808, the end command of the high frequency state is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. As a result, in the sound / light side MPU 82, it is possible to specify that the state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode has ended, and it is possible to make the content of the effect correspond to it. In the following step S809, the external output setting process at the end of the high frequency state is executed. The processing content of the external output setting processing will be described later. After that, in step S810, the high frequency end flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to "0", and then the mode transition process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), after executing the mode transition process in step S605, the special figure special electric counter value is cleared to "0" in step S606, and then the special figure is being finalized. End the process. As a result, in the next special figure special electric control process, the special figure change start process will be executed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S604, the process proceeds to step S607, the information of the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is read, and the information of the opening time is read in step S608. Special figure Set to the special electric timer counter. By the way, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode.

In the following step S609, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The opening command is a command for causing the sound / light side MPU 82 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the open / close execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various big hit results and small hit results is the game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the sound / light side MPU 82 can execute the effect of the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

In the following step S610, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the process of step S610 is executed. Become.

After that, in step S611, after executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, the process during confirmation of this special figure is terminated. The processing content of the external output setting processing at the start of the bonus will be described later.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing in step S309 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special electric start processing, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed, and if so, whether or not the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results. Is determined. If any of the jackpot results is obtained, 15 is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 64, and 10 is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 64. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main MPU 62, and the winning counter is an upper limit number of game balls in one round game or one open / close number specified mode. It is a counter for specifying whether or not a prize has been generated by the main MPU 62. Then, the opening duration corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special electric power timer counter, and the special electric power winning device 32 is opened. Further, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened, the opening command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. Upon receiving the release command, the sound / light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effect in the open / close execution mode accordingly.

When the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by a small hit result, 15 is set in the opening / closing counter provided in the main RAM 64, and 10 is set in the winning counter. The open / close counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed by the main MPU 62 in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number specified mode. Then, the opening duration corresponding to the small hit result is set in the special electric power timer counter, and the special electric power winning device 32 is opened. Further, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened, the opening command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82.

In both the case where the big hit result is the trigger and the case where the small hit result is the trigger, after the special electric winning device 32 is opened, the special electric special electric counter is added by 1 and the special electric power start processing is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter when the special electric start processing is executed is "3", it becomes "4" after 1 addition.

<Processing while the special electric train is open>
Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step S310 in the special power control processing (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special electric open processing, if the opening / closing execution mode this time is the round number regulation mode, it is determined whether or not the end condition of one round game is satisfied, and if the end condition is satisfied, it is determined. The special electric winning device 32 is closed, and a closing command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, and specifically, is 1 sec, which is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. Further, when the special electric winning device 32 is closed, the special electric special electric counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the special electric electric opening processing is executed, it becomes "5" after 1 addition.

When the opening / closing execution mode this time is the opening / closing number regulation mode, the special electric winning device 32 is closed when the opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 has elapsed, and the closing command is issued to the sound / light side MPU 82. Send to. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the open / close counter after 1 subtraction is "0", and if it is not "0", the closing time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. As described above, the closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, if the opening duration has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the special electric winning device 32, and if a prize has been generated, the winning counter is decremented by 1. When the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0", the open / close counter is cleared to "0" and the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Further, when the special electric winning device 32 is closed, the special electric special electric counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether or not the value of the open / close counter is "0". In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the special electric electric opening processing is executed, it becomes "5" after 1 addition.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the special electric closing process in step S311 in the special drawing special electric control process (FIG. 13) will be described.

In the special electric closing processing, it is determined whether or not both the round counter and the open / close counter are "0". If either one is not "0", it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not passed, the processing during closing of this special electric power is terminated as it is, and if the closing time has passed, the special electric power winning device 32 is opened and the execution trigger of the opening / closing execution mode this time. Set the opening duration corresponding to the hit result in the special figure special electric timer counter. Further, when the special electric winning device 32 is opened, the opening command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. Then, after subtracting 1 from the special figure special electric counter, the processing during closing of the special electric power is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special electric power closing process is executed, it becomes "4" after 1 subtraction.

On the other hand, when both the round counter and the open / close counter are "0", the ending command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82. The ending command is a command for making the sound / light side MPU 82 recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various big hit results and small hit results is the game result that triggered the open / close execution mode. Therefore, the sound / light side MPU 82 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. Then, after the special figure special electric counter is added by 1, the processing during closing of the special electric power is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special electric power closing process is executed, it becomes "6" after 1 addition.

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric stop processing in step S312 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special electric end processing, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not passed, the special train termination process is terminated as it is. If the ending time has elapsed, the game state transition process is executed in step S902, the external output setting process at the end of the bonus is executed in step S903, and the special figure special electric counter is set to "0" in step S904. After clearing, the special train termination process is terminated.

The external output setting process at the end of the bonus in step S903 will be described later, and the game state transition process in step S902 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that has ended this time is either the advantageous jackpot result A or the advantageous jackpot result B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the value corresponding to each jackpot result is set in the high probability counter and the high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 in step S1002. Specifically, in the case of the advantageous jackpot result A, "30" is set in both the high probability counter and the high frequency counter, and in the case of the advantageous jackpot result B, the high probability counter and the high frequency counter are set. Set both to "50".

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1003 whether the hit result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode that has ended this time is either the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result or the advantageous jackpot result C. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, "70" is set in each of the high probability counter and the high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that has ended this time is an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1005, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not the value of the high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 is "0". When the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more, "70" is set in both the high probability counter and the high frequency counter in step S1004. If the value of the high frequency counter is "0", "70" is set in the high probability counter in step S1007.

If a negative determination is made in step S1005, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that has ended this time is a low probability jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the high probability counter is cleared to "0" and the high frequency counter is set to "100" in step S1009.

When the processes of step S1002, step S1004, step S1007, or step S1009 are executed, the game state transition process ends after the external output setting process at the start of high frequency is executed in step S1010. In the external output setting process, the external output of the signal indicating the high frequency support mode is started on condition that the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1008, it means that the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode ended this time is the small hit result. In this case, the mode transition process (FIG. 18) already described is executed in step S1011. Then, in step S1012, after setting “30” in the small hit post-counter, the game state transition process is terminated.

<Processing configuration in the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92>
Next, each process for controlling the execution of the effect and the notification on the sound / light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing of MPU82 on the sound light side>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a sound light side MPU 82 with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S1101, the main command storage process is executed. The main command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound / light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 84 is provided with a main side ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main side MPU 62, and commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the main side ring buffer. As it goes on, it is read out in sequence according to the stored order.

In the following step S1102, the display side command storage process is executed. The display-side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound / light-side RAM 84 when a command is received from the display-side MPU 92. The sound light side RAM 84 is provided with a display side ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the display side MPU 92, and commands received from the display side MPU 92 are sequentially stored in the display side ring buffer. As it goes on, it is read out in sequence according to the stored order.

After that, in step S1103, the main command correspondence process for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main command correspondence process.

In the main command corresponding process, first, the mode process is executed in step S1201. The processing content of the processing for the mode will be described later. In the following step S1202, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62. When these commands are received, the game result is stored in step S1203. Specifically, from the information included in the variable command, information on which is the result of the winning / failing lottery or the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of this game round is specified. A process of writing the specified information to the sound / light side RAM 84 is executed. In the storage process, the lottery result data included in the variable command is collated with the lottery result data included in the type command, and the communication of these variable commands and the type command is normally performed. It may be determined whether or not the communication is broken, and if the communication is abnormal, the notification processing and the data storage processing corresponding to the communication may be performed.

In the following step S1204, the advance notice lottery process is executed. In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the advance notice on the symbol display device 41 in this game round. As for such a notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display, or a part of the symbol display. In a situation where a symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is used as the previous mode. Also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The notice display can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability. Further, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed results, and the advance notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A notice lottery will be held.

In the following step S1205, the stop symbol determination process is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is either a low probability jackpot result or an advantageous jackpot result A to C, a stop in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the result is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, in both the low probability jackpot result and the advantageous jackpot result A to C, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same even-numbered symbol combination can be selected. However, it is set that the probability that the combination of odd-numbered symbols is selected is higher in the advantageous jackpot results A to C than in the low probability jackpot result. As a result, when the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player shifts to the high-probability mode than when the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed. You will expect it. The effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result, or a small hit result, the same symbol combination is established on all effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of specific symbols (“3.4.1”) is established on one valid line L1 to L5, which is the stop result that is not performed, is determined as the information of the stop result this time. .. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is out of order, the presence / absence of reach display is specified from the content of the variable command. When the reach display occurs, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the combination is on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the above specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is on all the effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the stop result of this time.

In the following step S1206, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed. In the process, the information on the display duration of the game times is specified from the content of the variable command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the game result specified in the above step S1203, and the above step. An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process in S1204 is selected. When selecting this effect pattern, the effect pattern table provided in the sound light side ROM 83 is referred to.

Here, the effect pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the effect pattern table, the effect pattern is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the type of the variable command and the type of the result of the advance notice lottery process in step S1204. Specifically, in the case of the variable command "A111", when the advance notice lottery result 1 is used, two pseudo-reams, A reach, and A special reach are selected as the effect pattern, and when the advance notice lottery result 2 is used. One pseudo-ream, B reach, A cut-in, and A special reach are selected as the production pattern, and when the notice lottery result is 3, one pseudo-ream, C reach, and A are selected as the production patterns. Special reach is selected.

Pseudo-ream means that high-speed fluctuations are started in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 and switched to low-speed fluctuations, and then fluctuation display in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is terminated and a predetermined stop result is obtained. The unit variation effect of being displayed is an effect that is performed a plurality of times during one game. In this case, in the final unit variation effect during one game round, the combination of symbols corresponding to the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process in the main MPU 62 is stopped and displayed, and in the unit variation effect before that, the pseudo-ren The combination of symbols indicating that is is stopped and displayed. As for the combination of symbols indicating that they are in this pseudo-ream, the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, the unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result, and the small hit result is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the combination of reach symbols is also a combination that is not stopped and displayed, and is a combination of symbols that makes it recognizable that it is a pseudo-ream. For example, the combination of symbols "3, 5, 7" is stopped and displayed on one effective line.

A reach is a normal reach performed in a situation where an A type character is appearing, and B reach is a normal reach performed in a situation where a B type character is appearing, and is a C reach. Is a normal reach performed in a situation where a C type character appears. The A cut-in is an effect in which a cut-in image of an A-type character is displayed in a situation where normal reach is being performed. The A special reach is a special reach performed in a situation where an A type character appears.

For one variation command transmitted from the main MPU 62 as described above, the sound light side MPU 82 can select a plurality of types of effect patterns based on the result of the advance notice lottery process. However, in all of the plurality of types of effect patterns that can be selected from these one variation command, the display duration of the entire game round is the common display duration corresponding to the one variation command. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect for game rounds according to the display duration determined by the main MPU 62, and while suppressing the number of types of variable commands transmitted from the main MPU 62 to become extremely large. It is possible to diversify the production patterns.

In addition, the effect patterns that can be selected from one variable command have common effect contents that exist in common. Specifically, the variable command of "A111" is common in that a pseudo-ream occurs and an A special reach occurs. This makes it easy to design the pachinko machine 10 so that it has a common display duration while being configured so that a plurality of types of effect patterns can be selected from one variable command at the design stage.

As described above, the configuration in which a plurality of types of effect patterns can be selected from one variation command is the same for other variation commands. For example, in the case of the variation command "A112", a plurality of types of effect are produced. Although the pattern can be selected, it is common in that C reach occurs between the production patterns. Further, for example, in the case of the variable command "A113", although the configuration is such that a plurality of types of effect patterns can be selected, it is common in that three pseudo-reams occur between the effect patterns.

Returning to the description of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22), after executing the process of step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, a process of writing each information of the type of the effect pattern selected in the above step S1206 and the type of the stop symbol determined in the above step S1205 to the sound light side RAM 84 is executed. Since the effect pattern includes information on the display duration of this game, by writing the effect pattern information to the sound / light side RAM 84, not only the effect pattern information but also the display duration information can be obtained. The sound light side MPU 82 can be read again. However, the sound / light side MPU 82 does not measure the display duration.

In the following step S1208, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of the step S1205 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of the step S1206 are transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S1202, or after the process of step S1208 is executed, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1210. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 92 to make the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round stand by on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time.

When a negative determination is made in step S1209, or after the process of step S1210 is executed, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not the opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, the opening correspondence process is executed in step S1212. In the opening correspondence process, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect content in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is determined. To execute the process for. In the following step S1213, the opening command corresponding to the processing result of the above step S1212 is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S1211, or after the process of step S1213 is executed, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not a release command has been received. When the release command is received, in step S1215, the display side MPU 92 is made to recognize that the opening of the special electric winning device 32 is newly started, that is, the round game of 1 is newly started. A release command is sent to the display side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S1214, or after the process of step S1215 is executed, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not a closure command has been received. When the closing command is received, in step S1217, the display side MPU 92 is made to recognize that the special electric winning device 32 is closed, that is, the round game of 1 is completed. Send a close command.

When a negative determination is made in step S1216, or after the process of step S1217 is executed, it is determined in step S1218 whether or not the ending command has been received. If the ending command has been received, the ending correspondence process is executed in step S1219. In the ending correspondence process, the content of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the winning / failing lottery mode is executed. do. The processing content of the ending correspondence process will be described in detail later. In the following step S1220, the ending command corresponding to the processing result of the above step S1219 is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S1218, or after the process of step S1220 is executed, it is determined in step S1221 whether or not a notification command has been received. The notification command is used when it is specified in the fraud detection process in step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) of the main MPU 62 that a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In addition to being output, it is also output when it is specified in the input state monitoring process of step S212 that the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is in the open state. When the notification command is received, in order to perform the notification, the light emission data reading process is executed in step S1222, and the sound output data reading process is executed in step S1223. As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is performed in a mode corresponding to the content of the notification command, that is, a mode corresponding to the event that triggered the output of the notification command. Will be. After that, in step S1224, the notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S1221 or after the process of step S1224 is executed, it is determined in step S1225 whether or not a release command has been received. The release command is output when it is specified in the fraud detection process in step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) of the main MPU 62 that the state in which a predetermined event has occurred has been canceled. It is also output when it is specified in the input state monitoring process of step S212 that the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 has transitioned from the open state to the closed state. When the release command is received, the light emission data set in step S1222 and the sound output data set in step S1223 are cleared in step S1226. After that, in step S1227, the release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S1225, or after the process of step S1227 is executed, the other corresponding processes are executed in step S1228, and then the main command correspondence process is terminated. In other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

The demo display means that a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation where the open / close execution mode is not in progress. In this case, or after the power supply to the main MPU 62 is started or after the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 3 sec) without starting a new game round. ) Has elapsed, it is started in the symbol display device 41. In the demo display, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 perform a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation. After or instead of displaying the image, a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the demo display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variablely displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demo display will be diversified.

<V interrupt processing of MPU92 on the display side>
Here, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP95 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, the VDP95 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner portion of the display surface 41a and is on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signals are sequentially output to the dots lined up, and the image signals are output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface 41a. In this case, the VDP 95 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display side MPU 92 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display side MPU 92 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be started in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, first, the command analysis process is executed in step S1301. Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the display side RAM 94 is analyzed. In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not a new command is received based on the analysis result of step S1301. If a new command has been received, the command correspondence process is executed in step S1303.

In the command correspondence process, first, when the stop result command and the pattern command are received, the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the display side ROM 93 and written to the display side RAM 94.

The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for this game round is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the production for this game round is defined.

The pattern data table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 25. Note that FIG. 25 is an example of a pattern data table that can be selected when the advantageous jackpot result C is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 25, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the display duration of the target game times is set in the pattern data table, and the contents of the task are set according to each pointer information. Information, information on whether to output a command, and information on additional data are set.

The information on the content of the task is the information set to display the video corresponding to the game times this time, and unless the information that does not reflect the information on the content of the task is set as additional data, each An image corresponding to the task content information is displayed in the frame. In the information of the content of the task, information of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 95 in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

Specifically, regarding the pattern data table shown in FIG. 25, the pointer information of "0" is set with the data at the start of fluctuation, and the pointer information of "200" is set with the data at the start of the advance notice effect. , The data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", the data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and the data at the start of super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". The data at the start of the final effect is set in the pointer information of "1000", and the data at the end of the fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "1400". Each of these pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling the moving image display between the break timings is set.

The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the display side MPU 92 to the sound light side MPU 82 and the type of the command. The display side MPU 92 outputs a command to the sound light side MPU 82 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, so that the display light emitting unit 53 can execute the light effect according to the content of the image, and the speaker unit. At 54, it is possible to execute a sound output effect according to the content of the image.

Specifically, regarding the pattern data table shown in FIG. 25, command data is set for the pointer information of "0" in which the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the content of the task. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the game times, the light emission control and the sound output control are started in the sound light side MPU 82 based on the command transmission from the display side MPU 92 to the sound light side MPU 82. In addition, in the content of the task, from each pointer information set for each of the data at the start of the advance notice effect, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the final effect, and the data at the end of the fluctuation. Also for the pointer information of the timing before the number of frames (number of pointers) for advance transmission, specifically, for each pointer information of "198", "398", "698", "998", "1398". , Command data is set. Therefore, the command transmission from the display side MPU 92 to the sound light side MPU 82 is performed in advance for the division timing other than the start of the fluctuation of the game times, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 and the light emission control are performed at these division timings. , The contents of the sound output control and the drive control of the moving object can be completely synchronized.

The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when there is an execution instruction of the notification. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the content of the task. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as a notification, the image display is displayed so that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. Will be done.

In the command correspondence process, when the final stop command is received, the setting process for the final stop is executed. In the setting process for the final stop, the process of reading the data table for statically displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round from the display side ROM 93 until the period during the final stop display elapses and writing it to the display side RAM 94 is performed. Execute.

In the command correspondence process, when the opening command is received, the opening data table corresponding to the opening command is read from the display side ROM 93 and written to the display side RAM 94. The data table for the opening is to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information that defines the processing required for. The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. That is, in the data table for the opening, not only the information group in which the processing necessary for displaying the image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the production. Data for sending a command to the optical MPU 82 is set. However, in the data table for the opening, the contents of the effect during each round game and during the interval period between the round games are defined from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is retained until the end of the corresponding round game, and similarly, the data during the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until. Then, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

In the command correspondence process, when either the open command or the close command is received, the setting process at the time of opening / closing is executed. In the setting process at the time of opening / closing, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

In the command correspondence process, when the ending command is received, the ending data table corresponding to the ending command is read from the display side ROM 93 and written to the display side RAM 94. The ending data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the effect for the ending on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. That is, in the data table for the ending, not only the information group in which the processing necessary for displaying the image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the effect. Data for sending a command to the optical MPU 82 is set.

In the command correspondence process, when the notification command is received, the notification data setting process is executed. In the notification data setting process, the notification data corresponding to the content of the notification included in the current notification command is written as additional data in the currently set data table. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of the notification target event is added to the effect image for the game round and the effect image for the open / close execution mode. ..

In the command correspondence process, when the release command is received, the notification data clear process is executed. In the notification data clearing process, among the notification data currently set in the additional data of the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time is notified. Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type to be canceled is canceled.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 24), when a negative determination is made in step S1302, or after the process of step S1303 is executed, the pointer update process is executed in step S1304. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the display side MPU 92 to grasp the processing necessary for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

In the following step S1305, task processing is executed. In the task process, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the pointer this time in the data table. If there is no additional data, the task data of the pointer this time is read from the data table, and according to the read task data, the VDP95 is displayed in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time. Performs the calculation of parameters necessary for giving drawing instructions. On the other hand, if additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the pointer this time in the data table, it is determined whether or not the additional data is additional data for the image of the task data. In the case of additional data, in order to read the task data and additional data of the pointer of this time from the data table and display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time according to the read task data and additional data. , Performs calculation of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to VDP95. If it is not additional data, the additional data of the pointer this time is read from the data table, and a drawing instruction is given to VDP95 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time according to the read additional data. Perform the calculation of the necessary parameters.

After executing the task process in step S1305, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not the command data exists in the area of presence / absence of the command output corresponding to the information of the pointer of this time in the data table. If the command data exists, it is the output timing of the command, so the command setting process is executed in step S1307.

In the command setting process, a command indicating that the production of the game times should be started, a command indicating that the advance notice display should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, A command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended, a command indicating that the effect of the open / close execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the round game should be started, and a command indicating that the effect of the interval between the round games should be started. A command indicating, a command indicating that the ending effect should be started, a command indicating that the demo display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82 according to the respective timings.

When a negative determination is made in step S1306, or after the process of step S1307 is executed, the drawing list output process is executed in step S1308, and then the V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to VDP95. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP95 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 97 according to this drawing list. The VDP 95 outputs a signal to the symbol display device 41 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, one frame of image is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

<Timer interrupt processing of MPU82 on the sound light side>
Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) of the sound light side MPU 82, after executing the main side command correspondence process in step S1103, the display side command correspondence process is executed in step S1104. In the display side command correspondence process, the process of reading the light emission data and the sound output data is executed according to the contents of the command received from the display side MPU 92. As a result, light emission control corresponding to the display content of the symbol display device 41 is executed for the display light emitting unit 53, and sound output control corresponding to the display content of the symbol display device 41 is executed for the speaker unit 54. To.

That is, in this pachinko machine 10, although the sound light side MPU 82 exists on the upstream side of communication with respect to the display side MPU 92 when the main side MPU 62 is used as a reference, the sound light side MPU 82 has a display side MPU 92. Dare to wait for the command to be sent before starting the production control. As a result, when each of the light emission effect, the sound output effect, and the display effect occurs in the same period, it becomes difficult for each effect to be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect means.

After that, in step S1105, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed according to the light emission data read by the main command correspondence process in step S1103 or the display side command correspondence process in step S1104.

In the following step S1106, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is performed according to the sound output data read in the main command correspondence process in step S1103 or the display side command correspondence process in step S1104. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Production in pachinko machine 10 to predict the number of continuations of high-probability mode>
Next, the content of the effect in the pachinko machine 10 for causing the player to predict the number of continuations of the high probability mode will be described.

First, the ending command output process executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. The ending command output process is executed in the process of closing the special electric power in step S311 in the special electric power control process (FIG. 13).

In the ending command output process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the hit result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is either the low probability jackpot result or the advantageous jackpot result A to C. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the ending command corresponding to those jackpot results is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 in step S1402. Specifically, if it is a low probability jackpot result, the first ending command is transmitted, if it is an advantageous jackpot result A, a second ending command is transmitted, and if it is an advantageous jackpot result B, a third ending command is transmitted. The ending command is transmitted, and if the advantageous jackpot result is C, the fourth ending command is transmitted. After that, this ending command output process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more, and whether the open / close execution mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode. Judge whether or not. In the case of the open / close execution mode shifted to during the low frequency support mode, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the hit result that triggered the shift of the open / close execution mode this time is a small hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, the ending command output process ends after the fifth ending command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 in step S1405.

If a negative determination is made in step S1404, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, the ending command output process ends after the sixth ending command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 in step S1407. If a negative judgment is made in step S1406, it means that the hit result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, so that the explicit ending command is issued to the sound side in step S1408. After sending to MPU82, this ending command output process ends.

In the case of the open / close execution mode shifted to the high frequency support mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, and the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether or not the hit result that triggered the transition of the opening / closing execution mode this time is a small hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, the ending command output process ends after the seventh ending command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 in step S1410. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it means that the hit result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result or an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result. After transmitting the eighth ending command to the sound light side MPU 82, the present ending command output process is terminated.

Next, the ending correspondence process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. The ending correspondence process is executed in step S1219 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22).

In the ending correspondence process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not any of the first to seventh ending commands has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502, and the lottery table corresponding to the received ending command is read from the sound / light side ROM 83. In the following step S1503, the lottery process of the display mode is executed. In the lottery process of the display mode, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter for lottery, which is a counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec), and the numerical value thereof is obtained. The display mode is selected by collating the information with the lottery table read out in step S1502. Then, in step S1504, the selected display mode is set as a future display mode. Since the ending command corresponding to the display mode set here is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1220 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22), the image corresponding to the set display mode is a symbol. Display control is performed on the display side MPU 92 so that it is displayed on the display device 41. After that, this ending correspondence process is terminated.

Here, a state in which the display mode is drawn by lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

The display mode is for notifying the player of the degree of expectation that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, and also for notifying the player of the degree of expectation that the number of times of the end reference number of the high probability mode is large. This is the display content of the symbol display device 41. The display corresponding to this display mode is started in the ending period of the open / close execution mode, and is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the subsequent game rounds. As shown in FIG. 28, six types of display modes, a first display mode to a sixth display mode, are set.

It should be noted that between the display modes, at least one of the background screen of the symbol display device 41 and the types of symbols that are variablely displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are different, and the symbol display device 41 "long continuation or longer". A display corresponding to a display mode such as "expectation" is made. Further, the sound output from the speaker unit 54 may be different between the display modes.

The first display mode to the third display mode are display modes selected when the support mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the high frequency support mode. Of the first display mode to the third display mode, the first display mode is a display mode that is easily selected when the high probability mode has a long end reference number, and the second display mode has an intermediate or short end reference number. The display mode is easy to select when the probability mode is set, and the third display mode is the display mode which is easy to select when the low probability mode is set.

On the other hand, the fourth display mode to the sixth display mode are display modes selected when the support mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency support mode. Of the 4th display mode to the 6th display mode, the 4th display mode is a display mode that is easily selected when it becomes a high probability mode, and the 5th display mode is a high probability mode and a low probability when it appears. It is a display mode in which the probabilities of the modes are substantially the same, and the sixth display mode is a display mode that is easily selected when the low probability mode is set.

When the first ending command is received, that is, when the low probability jackpot result is obtained, the first lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the first display mode is 5%, the selection rate of the second display mode is 10%, and the selection rate of the third display mode is 85%. When the second ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result A is obtained, the second lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the first display mode is 15%, the selection rate of the second display mode is 60%, and the selection rate of the third display mode is 25%. When the third ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result B is obtained, the third lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the first display mode is 30%, the selection rate of the second display mode is 50%, and the selection rate of the third display mode is 20%. When the fourth ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result C is obtained, the fourth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the first display mode is 85%, the selection rate of the second display mode is 10%, and the selection rate of the third display mode is 5%.

That is, when the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the ending period of the open / close execution mode and the display mode of the subsequent game times become the first display mode, so that the player has a high probability mode in which the end reference number of times is long. We will play the game with great expectation that it will be. Further, even if the third display mode is set, the possibility of the high probability mode remains, and further, the possibility of the high probability mode with a long end reference number remains, so that the player's expectation is completely lost. I won't do it.

When the fifth ending command is received, that is, when a small hit result is obtained during the low frequency support mode, the fifth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the fourth display mode is 5%, the selection rate of the fifth display mode is 10%, and the selection rate of the sixth display mode is 85%. When the sixth ending command is received, that is, when an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained during the low-frequency support mode, the sixth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the fourth display mode is 85%, the selection rate of the fifth display mode is 10%, and the selection rate of the sixth display mode is 5%.

That is, when the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode is set during the low frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode is continued after the open / close execution mode, the ending period of the open / close execution mode and the display mode of the subsequent game times are displayed. By entering the fourth display mode, the player will play the game with high expectation that the high probability mode will be entered. Further, even if the sixth display mode is set, the possibility of the high probability mode remains, so that the player's expectation is not completely lost.

When the 7th ending command is received, that is, when a small hit result is obtained during the high frequency support mode, the 7th lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the first display mode is 5%, the selection rate of the second display mode is 10%, and the selection rate of the third display mode is 85%. When the 8th ending command is received, that is, when an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result or an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained during the high-frequency support mode, the 8th lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the first display mode is 85%, the selection rate of the second display mode is 10%, and the selection rate of the third display mode is 5%.

That is, when the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode is set during the high frequency support mode, the ending period of the open / close execution mode and the display mode of the subsequent game times are set to the first display mode, so that the player is the end criterion. The game will be played with great expectation that the high-probability mode has been reset for a long time. Further, even if the third display mode is set, the possibility of the high probability mode remains, and the possibility that the high probability mode with a long end reference number is reset remains, so the player's expectation. The feeling does not disappear completely.

Returning to the description of the ending correspondence process (FIG. 27), when a negative determination is made in step S1501, it means that an explicit ending command has been received. In this case, after setting the explicit display mode in step S1505, the ending corresponding process ends. Since the ending command corresponding to the display mode set here is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1220 in the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22), the image corresponding to the set display mode is a symbol. Display control is performed on the display side MPU 92 so that it is displayed on the display device 41. After that, this ending correspondence process is terminated.

The explicit ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 when an explicit high accuracy jackpot result is obtained in the low frequency support mode. If an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained during the low-frequency support mode, the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is performed, and then the high-frequency support mode is set. On the other hand, other hit results do not result in this behavior. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the result is an explicit high-accuracy jackpot. Therefore, when an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained in the low-frequency support mode, the explicit display mode is set so that the player is clearly notified of the result. In the explicit display mode, an image indicating that the mode is high probability mode is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and an image indicating that the end reference number of times is 70 is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the mode processing executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. The mode processing is executed in step S1201 in the main command corresponding processing (FIG. 22).

In the mode processing, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the current display mode is one of the first display mode to the third display mode and the explicit display mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not an explicit high-accuracy state end command or a high-frequency state end command has been received. As already explained, the end command in the explicit high probability state is in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the game times for the end reference number of times are exhausted, and the low probability mode is the low frequency support. This is a command transmitted from the main MPU 62 when shifting to the mode state. In addition, as described above, the end command in the high-frequency state is in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the game times for the end reference number of times are exhausted, and the low-probability mode is in the low-frequency state. This is a command sent from the main MPU 62 when shifting to the support mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the processing for this mode is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the display mode is set to the normal mode, and then, in step S1604, the command for the normal mode is transmitted to the display side MPU 92, and then the processing for this mode is terminated. The normal mode is a display mode for notifying that the mode is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. An image corresponding to the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the corresponding image is displayed from the speaker unit 54. Sound is output.

If a negative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1605 whether the current display mode is any of the fourth display mode to the sixth display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1605, the processing for this mode is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the lottery condition of the display mode is satisfied. Specifically, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter for determining lottery conditions, which is a counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 and whose numerical information is updated periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec), and the numerical information is obtained. However, it is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the establishment of the lottery condition. The probability that the lottery condition is satisfied is 10% until the game is executed 10 times after the opening / closing execution mode, 50% in the range of 11 to 20 times, and 80 in the range of 21 to 30 times. It is%, and when it becomes 31 times, it becomes 100%. If a negative determination is made in step S1606, the processing for this mode is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the process proceeds to step S1607.

In step S1607, the lottery process in the display mode is executed. In this lottery process, the same process as in step S1503 in the ending corresponding process (FIG. 27) is executed. However, in the lottery process, first, a lottery for shifting to the normal mode is performed. The probability of winning the transition to the normal mode is 10% until the game is executed 10 times after the open / close execution mode, 50% in the range of 11 to 20 times, and the range of 21 to 30 times. Then, it is 80%, and when it becomes 31 times, it becomes 100%. If the transition to the normal mode is won, the normal mode is set in step S1608, and the corresponding display mode command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the following step S1609, and then the processing for this mode is terminated. do. On the other hand, if the transition to the normal mode is not won, the same lottery table as the lottery table used in the previous step S1503 is used as the lottery table. Then, in step S1608, the display mode corresponding to the lottery result is set, and in the subsequent step S1609, the corresponding display mode command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92, and then the processing for this mode is terminated.

As described above, even if the high probability mode is set, when the game rounds of the end reference number of times are executed, the low probability mode is set even if the open / close execution mode is not generated, and the end reference number of times is 0 times. In a configuration in which a plurality of types such as 30 times, 50 times, and 70 times are set, in the symbol display device 41 or the like, an effect for causing the player to predict the high probability mode and the end reference number of the high probability mode. Is done. As a result, the player not only plays the game while expecting to be in the high-probability mode, but also plays the game while expecting to be in the high-probability mode with a larger number of end reference times, which improves the interest of the game. Is planned.

<Direction using external device EX>
Next, a configuration for performing an effect using the external device EX will be described. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of the electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed.

As shown in FIG. 30, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as a management control means for managing each pachinko machine 10. The whole computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and the MPU 201 is mounted therein. In the MPU 201, various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and a ROM 202 storing fixed value data, various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202, information input from the pachinko machine 10, and the like are temporarily stored in the MPU 201. It is provided with RAM 203, which is a memory for storing the data. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL1. Then, the management process based on the information received from each pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In the island equipment S, an external device EX is installed so as to correspond one-to-one with each pachinko machine 10. Each external device EX is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, is electrically connected to the hall computer HC through the electric wiring group EL2, and is electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 through the electric wiring group EL3. It is connected. Each external device EX is provided with an external display device 301 for displaying various information and a plurality of types of external operation units 302 operated for displaying various information on the external display device 301. Has been done.

The external display device 301 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by an external control board described later provided in the external device EX. The external display device 301 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. There may be.

In the external display device 301, at least one of the number of times the game has been executed since the previous open / close execution mode, the number of times the open / close execution mode has been executed, the number of balls released since the opening of the game hall, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode are set. Various information such as the number of open / close execution modes generated in the continuous situation and the number of balls to be ejected in the continuous situation is displayed based on the signal from the hall computer HC. As a result, the player can grasp the above-mentioned various information by visually recognizing the external display device 301. By operating the external operation unit 302, various information displayed on the external display device 301 can be switched.

Next, with respect to the configuration for communicating between the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10, the hall computer HC, and the external device EX, and the electrical configuration of the external device EX, FIGS. 31 (a) and 31. This will be described with reference to (b).

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an external terminal board 79, and the main MPU 62 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 79 through the electrical wiring group EL4. Is electrically connected to the external terminal board 79 through the electrical wiring group EL1, and the external device EX is electrically connected to the external terminal board 79 through the electrical wiring group EL3. Then, various signals are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79, and various signals are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. Note that the hall computer HC does not transmit the signal to the pachinko machine 10, the external device EX does not transmit the signal to the pachinko machine 10, and the external device EX does not transmit the signal to the hall computer HC. ..

As shown in FIG. 31B, the external terminal board 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 79a to 79l. A total of 12 external terminals 79a to 79l are provided, and 9 of these external terminals 79a to 79i are terminals for externally outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC, and the remaining 3 terminals. The external terminals 79j to 79l are terminals for externally outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX.

Specifically, as a terminal for externally outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress based on the fact that the main MPU 62 has won a big hit in the winning / failing lottery. Outputs information indicating that the external terminal 79a for big hits used to output and the open / close execution mode based on the fact that the big hit has been won or the small hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery of the main MPU 62. An external terminal 79b for the open / close execution mode used for the operation, an external terminal 79c for the number of games used to output information indicating that one game has been completed, and support during the open / close execution mode and high frequency. The fact that a prize has been awarded to either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, and the external terminal 79d for displaying the consecutive villas used to output information indicating that the player is in the mode. An external terminal 79e for operation used to output the indicated information, an external terminal 79f for fraud detection used to output information indicating that the occurrence of a predetermined fraud has been detected, and a predetermined number of games. An external terminal 79g for paying out, which is used to output information indicating that the ball has been paid out, and a main body opening, which is used to output information indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is open. An external terminal 79h and an external terminal 79i for opening the front door used for outputting information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened are included.

The type of terminal for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC is not limited to the above, and for example, information indicating that a special electric winning device 32 has been won is provided. It may be configured to be provided with an external terminal used for output. Further, it may be configured to be provided with an external terminal used for outputting information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been launched.

The MPU 201 of the hall computer HC manages the pachinko machine 10 by using the signals received through the external terminals 79a to 79i. For example, when it is specified that the pachinko machine 10 has detected fraud, the manager of the game hall or the like is notified that the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal. In addition, management data for managing the number of prize balls generated by the pachinko machine 10 is created. In addition, the number of occurrences of the open / close execution mode, the number of consecutive villas in the open / close execution mode in the situation where the high frequency support mode continues, and the number of game balls paid out during the consecutive villas are totaled, and the total information is displayed externally. Externally output to the external device EX through the electrical wiring group EL2 so that it can be displayed by the device 301. This makes it possible for the external display device 301 to output the above-mentioned various information. In the configuration in which not only the information indicating that a predetermined number of gaming balls have been paid out but also the information indicating that a predetermined number of gaming balls have been launched are output from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC. As a configuration in which the increase / decrease number of game balls in one pachinko machine 10 is totaled by the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC, and the totaled result is transmitted to the external device EX to display the totaled result on the external display device 301. May be good.

As a terminal for externally outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX, an external terminal 79j for serial command data transmission and each unit data included in the command data (for example, 1-bit data). It includes an external terminal 79k for a clock signal for identifying the data, and an external terminal 79l for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of the transmission start and transmission end of one command. That is, a command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX by serial communication. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that an external terminal for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided, or the command may be transmitted by parallel communication.

In the external device EX, a display effect linked to the pachinko machine 10 is performed by using the commands received through the external terminals 79j to 79l. The execution control of the display effect and the execution control of the information display based on the signal reception from the hall computer HC are performed by the external control board 311 built in the external device EX. As shown in FIG. 31A, the external control board 311 has an external MPU 312, an external VDP 315, and an external character ROM 316, which are elements in which the program ROM 313 and the work RAM 314 are combined into chips. And an external video RAM 317 are mounted.

The external MPU 312 analyzes various commands received from the main MPU 62 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the external VDP 315 (specifically, the internal command for the external VDP 315). Generation) is carried out.

The program ROM 313 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the external MPU 312, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The work RAM 314 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when executing various programs by the external MPU 312, and is a volatile memory that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is a means of sexual memory.

The external VDP315 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the external display device 301. Since the external VDP315 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The external VDP 315 adjusts the timings of the external MPU 312, the external video RAM 317, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and stores the image data stored in the external video RAM 317 in the external character ROM 316. Is read out from the above at a predetermined timing and displayed on the external display device 301.

The external character ROM 316 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the external display device 301. The external character ROM 316 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The external video RAM 317 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the external display device 301, and the display content of the external display device 301 is changed based on rewriting the content of the external video RAM 317. To.

Here, in the program ROM 313 of the external MPU 312, in addition to the program dedicated to the external device EX for displaying various information on the external display device 301 based on the operation of the external operation unit 302 and the fixed value data. In the program ROM 93 of the display side MPU 92, the same program and fixed value data as the program and fixed value data for displaying and controlling the effect for game rounds are stored. Further, in the external character ROM 316, among the image data of various characters stored in the character ROM 96 of the display control device 90, the image data used as the effect for the game round is stored. As a result, based on the display control of the external MPU 312, the external display device 301 can perform the same display effect as the display effect for the game round displayed on the symbol display device 41.

<Processing configuration for producing using the external device EX>
Next, a processing configuration for performing an effect using the external device EX will be described.

<External output processing at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62>
First, the external output process at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32 (a). The external output process at the start of fluctuation is executed in step S417 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 14).

In the external output process at the start of the fluctuation, first, in step S1701, a lottery for generating the interlocking effect is executed. Specifically, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter for generation lottery, which is a counter provided in the main RAM 64 and whose numerical information is updated periodically (for example, in a cycle of 4 msec). Occurrence of interlocking effect It is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the winning. The probability of winning the occurrence of the interlocking effect is 70% if this game is a small hit result or a big hit result, and 50 if this game is out of reach and the reach is displayed. It is 10% if the game times this time is a game time that results in an outlier without the reach display occurring. In the following step S1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the generation lottery in step S1701 is the generation winning of the interlocking effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1702, the external output process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, the command correspondence table is read from the main ROM 63. The command correspondence table is table data for specifying an external command at the start of fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation command transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in this game round. The command correspondence table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32 (b).

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the command correspondence table, an external command at the start of fluctuation is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the fluctuation command. Here, as already described, the sound / light side MPU 82 may select a plurality of types of effect patterns based on the result of the advance notice lottery process for one variable command transmitted from the main side MPU 62. However, there is a common effect content that exists in common in the effect patterns that can be selected from one variable command. The data of this common effect content is set in the external command at the start of fluctuation. In addition to the identification data for indicating that the command is a variable command, the variable command includes lottery result data corresponding to the results of the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process. , The time data corresponding to the display duration is set. On the other hand, the external command at the start of the fluctuation does not include the lottery result data and the time data. Therefore, the external command at the start of fluctuation has a small amount of data for the command for fluctuation, and specifically, it is 1-byte data. The external command at the start of fluctuation is set with identification data to indicate that it is an external command at the start of fluctuation by the data of the upper 4 bits, and is common to the above by the data of the lower 4 bits. The production content is set.

Specifically, regarding the content shown in FIG. 32 (b), an external command at the start of the fluctuation of "B1" is set corresponding to the command for fluctuation of "A111", and the external command at the start of the fluctuation is set. As the data of the common production content, the data that can specify the content of pseudo-continuous possession and A special reach is set in. In addition, an external command at the start of the change of "B2" is set corresponding to the change command of "A112", and the external command at the start of the change has the content of C reach as the data of the common effect content. Specifiable data is set. In addition, an external command at the start of the change of "B3" is set corresponding to the change command of "A113", and the external command at the start of the change is used as data of common effect contents three times in a pseudo-ream. Data that can specify the contents is set.

Returning to the explanation of the external output process at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 32 (a)), after reading the command correspondence table in step S1703, the content of the fluctuation command output this time to the sound light side MPU 82 in step S1704. To identify. After that, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a game round corresponding to the small hit result, and in step S1706, whether it is in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Judge whether or not. As a result of each of these determination processes, if the high probability mode is in the low frequency support mode and the current game round is a small hit result, the process proceeds to step S1708, and in other cases, the step is performed. Proceed to S1707.

In step S1707, the external command at the start of fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation command output this time to the sound / light side MPU 82 is read from the command correspondence table. On the other hand, in step S1708, the external command at the start of the fluctuation, which is set on the lower side by one address, is commanded to the external command at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation command output this time to the MPU 82 on the sound / light side. Read from the table. Here, in the command correspondence table, the common effect content of the variable command set on the lower side by one address with respect to one variable command is different from the common effect content of the former variable command. In addition to being set, the common effect content is an effect content that cannot be selected by the sound / light side MPU 82 based on the former variable command. Therefore, in step S1708, it means that the external command at the start of the variation corresponding to the variation command whose effect contents do not match the variation command transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 in this game round is selected.

After executing the process of step S1707 or step S1708, the process proceeds to step S1709, and the external command at the start of fluctuation selected in step S1707 or step S1708 is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. After that, the external output process is terminated.

<Production control process for game rounds executed by the external MPU 312>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33, the game rotation effect control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described. It should be noted that the game rotation effect control process is started periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the external display device 301 is executing the effect for the game round. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not an external command at the start of fluctuation is received from the main MPU 62. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the effect control process for this game is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, the external command at the start of the fluctuation received this time is supported in step S1803. The data table to be used is read from the program ROM 313 and written to the work RAM 314. After that, the effect control process for this game is terminated.

By setting the data table in step S1803, the internal command generated corresponding to the data table is periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315. As a result, the image output corresponding to the internal command is executed on the external VDP315, and the external display device 301 executes the interlocking effect for the game round corresponding to the external command at the start of the fluctuation. The image corresponding to the interlocking effect for the game round is displayed on the display surface of the external display device 301, but the number of times the open / close execution mode is executed, the number of consecutive villas in the open / close execution mode, and after the open / close execution mode. Images of various information such as the number of times the game is executed and the number of game balls to be paid out are displayed so as not to overlap with the image corresponding to the interlocking effect for the game times.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the game round end signal has been received from the hall computer HC. The game round end signal is transmitted to the hall computer HC in the external output process (step S602) at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16) in the main MPU 62, and the hall computer HC sends the game round end signal. Upon reception, the game round end signal is transmitted to the external device EX corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has received the signal. The game round end signal may be directly transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. In this case, the game round end signal may not be transmitted to the hall computer HC, and may be transmitted. May be.

If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the main game rotation effect control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, the game rotation in the external display device 301 is made in step S1805. After ending the interlocking effect of, the effect control process for this game is terminated. Specifically, in step S1805, the data table set in the previous step S1803 is cleared from the work RAM 314, and the data table for demonstration effect read from the program ROM 313 is written to the work RAM 314. As a result, in the external display device 301, the interlocking effect for the game round is ended, and the demo effect is started.

<Details of interlocking production for game rounds executed by the external device EX>
Next, with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34, the contents of the interlocking continuous firing for the game rounds executed by the external device EX will be described. FIG. 34 (a) shows a period in which the symbol is variablely displayed only in the final stop symbol row (specifically, the symbol row Z2) in the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 34 (b-1) to 34 (b) show. -4) shows the display contents of the external display device 301, and FIGS. 34 (c-1), 34 (c-2), 34 (d-1), and 34 (d-2) are symbol display devices. The display contents of 41 are shown. In addition, in FIGS. 34 (b-1) to (b-4), images other than the interlocking effect for the game round are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c), a case where the interlocking effect for the game round corresponding to the variable command is executed will be described.

A variation command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound / light side MPU 82, and an external command at the start of the variation is externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312, so that FIG. 34 (c-1) shows. As shown, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started, and as shown in FIG. 34 (b-1), the interlocking effect for the game round in the external display device 301 is started. Will be done.

In this case, in the symbol display device 41, after the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 34 (c-2), the reach effect using the first character CH1 as the reach character is started, but it is externally attached. In the display device 301, as shown in FIGS. 34 (b-1) and 34 (b-2), from the timing before the timing of t1 and, specifically, the start timing of the interlocking effect for the game round, A notice effect using one character CH1 is started. Then, after the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 34 (b-3), 34 (b-4), and 34 (c-2), the external display device 301 and the symbol display device 41 both have a second position. An effect using one character CH1 is performed. The external display device 301 displays a moving image in which the first character CH1 advances in a predetermined direction from the start timing of the interlocking effect for the game times, but the first character CH1 is the game times. Will be displayed on the external display device 301 until the end of.

As described above, when the first character CH1 is displayed on the external display device 301 at a timing before the timing of t1, a reach effect using the first character CH1 is generated in the symbol display device 41. It is possible to notify this in advance. As a result, the player can grasp in advance the content of the effect generated by the symbol display device 41 by checking the external display device 301, and can increase the expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot result. Will be.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 (a), 34 (b), and 34 (d), a case where the interlocking effect for the game round, which does not correspond to the variable command, is executed will be described.

A variation command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound / light side MPU 82, and an external command at the start of the variation is externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312, so that FIG. 34 (d-1) shows. As shown, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started, and as shown in FIG. 34 (b-1), the interlocking effect for the game round in the external display device 301 is started. Will be done.

In this case, the external display device 301 starts the interlocking effect using the first character CH1, but after the timing of t1, the symbol display device 41 does not start the effect using the first character CH1 instead. An effect using the second character CH2 different from the first character CH1 is started. The first character CH1 is not displayed at all on the symbol display device 41. Then, in this game round, the effect using the first character CH1 is performed on the external display device 301, and the effect using the second character CH2 is performed on the symbol display device 41 throughout the entire period after the timing of t1. ..

As described above, the character for effect displayed on the symbol display device 41 is different from the character displayed for advance notice on the external display device 301, so that the player recognizes that some kind of discrepancy has occurred. .. Then, the disagreement of the character occurs in a state where the high probability mode is a low frequency support mode, that is, a situation where the winning / failing lottery mode is not clearly shown to the player. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the high probability mode is internally set by using the interlocking effect, and the player's attention to the effect content in the external display device 301 is increased. Is possible.

Further, the above-mentioned character mismatch occurs when a small hit result is obtained in the state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. This makes it possible to increase the advantage for the player of the small hit result.

<External output setting process at the start of the bonus executed by the main MPU 62>
Next, the external output setting process at the start of the bonus executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35 (a). The external output setting process at the start of the bonus is executed in step S611 in the process during special figure determination (FIG. 16).

In the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, first, in step S1901, various signals are set to the HI level. Specifically, among the signals transmitted to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79, the signal output through the external terminal 79a for jackpot and the signal output through the external terminal 79b for the open / close execution mode are connected. The signal output through the external terminal 79d for displaying the villa is set to the HI level.

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high frequency winning mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the external output setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, the reproduction lottery process is executed. Specifically, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter for reproduction lottery, which is a counter provided in the main RAM 64 and whose numerical information is updated periodically (for example, in a cycle of 4 msec). Occurrence of reproduction effect It is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the winning. The probability of winning the reproduction effect is 50% when the premium character does not appear in the immediately preceding game, and 80% when the premium character appears in the immediately preceding game. .. In the following step S1904, it is determined whether or not the result of the reproduction lottery process in step S1903 is the winning of the reproduction effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1904, the external output setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In step S1905, the variable command transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 in the immediately preceding game round is read, and in the following step S1906, the read variable command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. After that, the external output setting process is terminated. In the variable command corresponding to the appearance of the premium character, the premium character is set as a common effect content. That is, when the variable command is transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82, the premium character is displayed on the symbol display device 41 regardless of the result of the advance notice lottery process in the sound / light side MPU 82.

<External output setting process at the end of the bonus executed by the main MPU 62>
Next, the external output setting process at the end of the bonus executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35 (b). The external output setting process at the end of the bonus is executed in step S903 in the special electric end process (FIG. 19).

In the external output setting process at the end of the bonus, first, in step S2001, various signals are set to the LOW level. Specifically, among the signals transmitted to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79, the signal output through the external terminal 79a for jackpot and the signal output through the external terminal 79b for the open / close execution mode are LOW. Set to level. Further, when the low frequency support mode is set after the end of the opening / closing execution mode this time, the signal output through the external terminal 79d for displaying the consecutive villas is set to the LOW level.

When the high-frequency support mode is set instead of the low-frequency support mode after the end of the current open / close execution mode, the signal output through the external terminal 79d for displaying the consecutive villas is maintained at the HI level. In this case, the signal is set to the LOW level in step S803 or step S809 in the mode transition process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62.

In the following step S2002, it corresponds to the type of the ending command transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 in the ending command output process (FIG. 26) immediately before in the special electric closed closing process (step S311) of the special electric special electric control process (FIG. 13). Read the command corresponding to the number of times from the main ROM 63. That is, when the first ending command is transmitted, the command corresponding to the first number of times is read, and when the second ending command is transmitted, the command corresponding to the second number of times is read, and the third ending command is transmitted. If so, read the command corresponding to the third number of times, read the command corresponding to the fourth number of times if the fourth ending command is transmitted, and read the command corresponding to the fifth number of times if the fifth ending command is transmitted. Read, if the 6th ending command is transmitted, the 6th number corresponding command is read, if the 7th ending command is transmitted, the 7th number corresponding command is read, and the 8th ending command is transmitted. If there is, the command corresponding to the 8th number of times is read, and if the explicit ending command is transmitted, the command corresponding to the explicit number of times is read. In the following step S2003, the command corresponding to the number of times read is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. After that, the external output setting process is terminated.

<Bonus effect control process executed by the external MPU 312>
Next, the bonus effect control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bonus effect control process is started periodically (for example, in a 2 msec cycle).

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the bonus effect is being executed by the external display device 301. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the hit system signal received from the hall computer HC is at the HI level. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot signal through the external terminal 79a for jackpot and a signal for opening / closing execution mode through the external terminal 79b for opening / closing execution mode as signals indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the opening / closing execution mode. And can be sent. On the other hand, in the hall computer HC, by selecting the side to be electrically connected among these external terminals 79a and 79b, only the desired signal among the jackpot signal and the open / close execution mode signal is received. By doing so, it is possible to manage the number of times the jackpot result is obtained and the number of times the open / close execution mode is entered on the desired side while suppressing the number of input terminals on the hall computer HC side. Under such circumstances, the signal of the side selected by the hall computer HC is transmitted from the hall computer HC to the external device EX. Therefore, in step S2102, it is determined whether or not the signal on the side where the electrical connection is selected in the hall computer HC among the jackpot signal and the open / close execution mode signal is at the HI level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the bonus effect control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not a variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the data table for normal bonus effect is read from the program ROM 313 and written to the work RAM 314 in step S2104.

By setting the data table in step S2104, an internal command corresponding to the data table is generated and periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315. As a result, the image output corresponding to the internal command is executed on the external VDP315, and the normal bonus effect is executed on the external display device 301. The image corresponding to the normal bonus effect is displayed on the display surface of the external display device 301, but the number of times the open / close execution mode is executed, the number of consecutive villas in the open / close execution mode, and the number of games after the open / close execution mode. Images of various information such as the number of times the game is executed and the number of game balls paid out are displayed so as not to overlap with the image corresponding to the above-mentioned normal bonus effect.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the data table for game rounds corresponding to the variable command is read from the program ROM 313 and written to the work RAM 314 in step S2105. At this time, the data table for the normal bonus effect, which is used after the execution control of the display effect using the data table for the game round is completed, is also written to the read work RAM 314.

By setting the data table in step S2105, an internal command corresponding to the data table is generated and periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315. As a result, the image output corresponding to the internal command is executed on the external VDP315, and the reproduction effect of the game times corresponding to the content of the variable command is executed on the external display device 301. The reproduction effect of the game times is an effect in which the display effect for the game times executed by the symbol display device 41 in the game time immediately before the opening / closing execution mode of this time is reproduced by the external display device 301. That is. By executing the reproduction effect of the game times on the external display device 301 in this way, the player overlooks the display effect executed on the symbol display device 41 during the game times that triggers the transition of the open / close execution mode. Even so, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to confirm it. In addition, it is possible to provide an opportunity for a player who wants to reconfirm the effect of the game times that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode and immerse himself in a sense of superiority.

However, in this reproduction effect, the effect for the game round is reproduced within the limit of the effect content that can be specified from the content of the variable command. Specifically, since the lottery process for the advance notice effect is executed by the sound / light side MPU 82, the content of the advance notice effect cannot be specified from the variable command. Further, since the type of the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed at the end of the game round on the symbol display device 41 is also determined by lottery on the sound light side MPU 82, the content of the final symbol can be specified from the variable command. Can not. On the other hand, the result of the winning / failing determination, the result of the distribution determination, the display duration of the game times, and the type of the common effect content can be specified from the variable command. Therefore, in the reproduction effect, the effect is executed over the display duration of the immediately preceding game round, and the common effect such as the reach effect generated in the immediately preceding game round is also executed, and finally stopped and displayed. The type of the symbol can correspond to the result of the hit / fail judgment and the result of the distribution judgment, but the type of the symbol may not match the one of the previous game round, and further notice effect. There is a possibility that the content of is not the same as that of the previous game. In the reproduction effect, the final stop symbol may not be displayed, or the advance notice effect may not be executed.

Further, in the situation where the reproduction effect is executed by the external display device 301, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41. In this case, the speaker unit 54 of the pachinko machine 10 outputs a sound corresponding to the display effect of the opening / closing execution mode, and the external device EX is not provided with a function to output the sound. Therefore, when the reproduction effect is executed, the display effect of the symbol display device 41 is reproduced among the effects for the game round, and the sound output effect of the speaker unit 54 is not reproduced. This also applies to the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 53.

The image corresponding to the reproduction effect of the game times is displayed on the display surface of the external display device 301, but the number of times the open / close execution mode is executed, the number of consecutive villas in the open / close execution mode, and the game after the open / close execution mode. Images of various information such as the number of times the game is executed and the number of game balls paid out are displayed so as not to overlap with the image corresponding to the reproduction effect of the game time.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the signal on the side of the jackpot signal and the open / close execution mode signal on which the electrical connection is selected in the hall computer HC becomes the LOW level in step S2106. Determine if it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the end processing of the bonus effect is executed in step S2107. Specifically, the data table set in step S2104 or step S2105 is cleared from the work RAM 314, and the demo effect data table read from the program ROM 313 is written to the work RAM 314. As a result, in the external display device 301, the bonus effect is ended and the demo effect is started.

If the process of step S2104, step S2105 or step S2107 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not a command corresponding to the number of times has been received from the main MPU 62. If the number-corresponding command has not been received, the bonus effect control process is terminated as it is, and if the number-corresponding command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2109, the lottery table corresponding to the command corresponding to the number of times received this time is read from the program ROM 313. The lottery table has the same configuration as the lottery table used in the lottery process of the display mode executed in steps S1502 to S1504 of the ending correspondence process (FIG. 27) in the sound light side MPU 82, and is a program. It is stored in the ROM 313 in advance. Then, in step S2109, when the command corresponding to the first number of times is received, the same lottery table as in the case of the first ending command is read, and when the command corresponding to the second number of times is received, the second ending command is received. If the same lottery table as in the case of is read, the same lottery table as in the case of the third ending command is read when the command corresponding to the third number is received, and the command corresponding to the fourth number is received. The same lottery table as in the case of the 4th ending command is read, and when the command corresponding to the 5th number is received, the same lottery table as in the case of the 5th ending command is read, and the command corresponding to the 6th number is received. If there is, the same lottery table as in the case of the 6th ending command is read, and if the command corresponding to the 7th number is received, the same lottery table as in the case of the 7th ending command is read, and the command corresponding to the 8th number is read. Is received, the lottery table similar to that in the case of the eighth ending command is read.

In the following step S2110, the lottery process in the display mode is executed. The lottery process in the display mode acquires numerical information from an external random number counter, which is a counter provided in the work RAM 314 and whose numerical information is updated periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec), and the numerical information is obtained. Is collated with the lottery table read out in step S2109 to select the display mode. Then, in step S2111, the selected display mode is set as a future display mode. The type of this display mode is the same as the type of the display mode selected in the sound light side MPU 82, and specifically, six types of the first display mode to the sixth display mode are set. Further, the selection rate of each display mode in each lottery table is also the same as in the case of the lottery table referred to by the sound light side MPU 82 (see FIG. 28). By executing the display mode setting process in step S2111, the external display device 301 displays the image corresponding to the set display mode. This type of image has a one-to-one correspondence with the display mode, and it is possible to recognize which display mode is selected in the external device EX by checking the external display device 301.

When the command corresponding to the explicit number of times is received, the explicit display mode is set instead of the processing of steps S2109 to S2111. Further, the display according to the display mode in the external display device 301 is changed to the display of the normal mode when the high frequency support mode ends in the high frequency support mode, and the game is played in the low frequency support mode. When the times are executed 20 times, the display is changed to the normal mode.

<Reproduction of the game times>
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a state in which the reproduction effect of the game times is performed by the external display device 301 will be described. 37 (a) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, FIG. 37 (b) shows the execution period of the reproduction effect of the game times, and FIGS. 37 (c-1) to 37 (c-). 3) shows the display contents of the external display device 301 when the reproduction effect of the game times is executed, FIG. 37 (d) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, and FIG. 37 (e) shows. Indicates the display content of the external display device 301 when only the normal bonus effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode continues for at least the duration T1 of the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the number of executions of the round game (for example, 15) for the period (for example, 5.4 sec) obtained by integrating the opening period (for example, 4 sec), the upper limit number of round games, and the firing cycle of the game ball. , At least continue for the total period of the interval period (for example, 28 sec) between each round game and the ending period (for example, 6 sec). This duration T1 is a period of the longest display duration T2 or more that can be selected in the game times. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, the external display device 301 displays the entire portion of the game round effect regardless of what game round effect is executed in the immediately preceding game round. It is possible to reproduce.

Further, the duration T1 of the high-frequency winning mode is set longer than the display duration T2 that can be selected in the game times. Correspondingly, in the external display device 301, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 starts the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode at the timing of t11, the opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode is executed until the timing of t21, which is a predetermined period later. A display effect indicating that the mode is started is performed, and a reproduction effect of the game times is started at the timing of the t21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-1), the external display device 301 starts the variable display of the symbol in the same manner as the variable display of the symbol for the game round in the symbol display device 41. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-2), the external display device 301 performs the same reach effect as the reach effect performed by the symbol display device 41 in the immediately preceding game round. After that, at the timing of t22 when the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is continuing, the reproduction effect of the game times is ended. In this case, from the timing of t22, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-3), the normal bonus effect is started on the external display device 301. Then, at the timing of t12 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode is terminated. In this case, the normal bonus effect on the external display device 301 ends.

On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the shortest duration T3 is shorter than the duration T1 of the high frequency winning mode and shorter than the longest display duration T2 that can be selected in the game rounds. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is set, the normal bonus effect is started on the external display device 301 from the timing of t31, which is the start timing, as shown in FIG. 37 (e). Then, the normal bonus effect is continued over the timing of t32, which is the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode.

<A state in which an effect is performed to predict the end reference number of times in the high probability mode>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, an effect for predicting the end reference number of times in the high probability mode will be described in each of the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. FIG. 38 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the external display device 301 performs an effect for predicting the end reference number of times in the high probability mode, and FIG. 38 (b) is a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the effect for predicting the end reference number of times of a high probability mode is performed in 41.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), on the external display device 301, the characters "expected long continuation" are displayed as an effect for predicting the end reference number of times in the high probability mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the symbol display device 41 displays the characters "expect middle continuation or more" as an effect for predicting the end reference number of times in the high probability mode. In each of the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301, the number of times the game is executed after the open / close execution mode is displayed (specifically, the character "5 times of continuation").

As described above, the effect for predicting the end reference number of times of the high probability mode is executed by each of the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. Further, the lottery process for determining the contents of these effects is performed individually. As a result, the player can refer to a plurality of types of information in predicting the end reference number of times in the high probability mode, and can make a high-level prediction.

In the external display device 301, the display corresponding to the end reference number of times in the high probability mode is not configured to display the end reference number as it is, but to display the expected degree for the end reference number. Even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs in the communication path from the main MPU 62 to the external display device 301, inconvenience is unlikely to occur.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The main MPU 62 outputs a command corresponding to the effect content of the effect for the game round to the external device EX. Then, in the external display device 301 of the external device EX, the effect corresponding to the command is executed. This makes it possible to execute effects that are related to each other beyond the framework of the pachinko machine 10 alone. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

The main MPU 62 externally outputs an external command at the start of the fluctuation at a timing before the production content of the effect for the game round corresponds to the result of the hit / miss determination. As a result, in a situation where the effect for the game round is being executed by the symbol display device 41 or the like, the effect corresponding to the effect for the game round can be executed by the external display device 301. In addition, since the external command at the start of fluctuation does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the pass / fail judgment, it is possible to suppress the act of misusing the result of illegally reading the external command at the start of fluctuation. Become. Further, it is possible to prevent the result of the hit / fail determination from being displayed on the external display device 301 before being displayed on the pachinko machine 10.

The external command at the start of the fluctuation does not include not only the information that clearly indicates the result of the hit / fail judgment but also the information that clearly shows the type of the hit result. This makes it possible to suppress the act of misusing the result of illegally reading the external command at the start of fluctuation. Further, it is possible to prevent the type of the hit result from being displayed on the external display device 301 before being displayed on the pachinko machine 10.

The external command at the start of the fluctuation does not include not only the information that clearly indicates the result of the winning / failing determination but also the information that clearly indicates the display duration of the game times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of external commands at the start of fluctuations, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting external commands at the start of fluctuations. On the other hand, when the effect for playing the game is completed in the pachinko machine 10, a signal indicating the end is output to the outside. As a result, even if the external command at the start of the fluctuation does not include the information on the display duration, it is possible for the external device EX to know that the effect for the game round has been completed.

Since the external command at the start of the fluctuation contains information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the effect for the game round, the effect corresponding to the part of the effect range is excluded. It can be executed by the attached display device 301. In addition, since it is configured to output information corresponding to a part of the production range instead of outputting the entire production for the game round, it is possible to reduce the types of external commands at the start of fluctuation. It is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting an external command at the start of fluctuation.

The external command at the start of one fluctuation is common to the effects for multiple types of game rounds. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of external commands at the start of fluctuations, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting external commands at the start of fluctuations.

Since the sound light side MPU 82 is configured to execute the advance notice lottery process when the change command is received from the main MPU 62 and derive the effect pattern corresponding to the lottery result, a plurality of types of effects are produced from one change command. The pattern can be derived. In this case, the external command at the start of the variation includes information that clearly indicates the content of the effect that is commonly executed in the effect pattern that can be derived from one command for variation. As a result, even in a situation where the entire content of the effect for the game round has not been determined, an external command at the start of the fluctuation that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the effect for the game round is output. It becomes possible. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the output timing of the external command at the start of fluctuation is improved, and it is possible to facilitate the design of the configuration for outputting the external command at the start of fluctuation.

The external command at the start of fluctuation has a one-to-one correspondence with the fluctuation command. As a result, even if an external command at the start of fluctuation is output in a situation where the entire effect content for the game round has not been determined, the effect on the external display device 301 can be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the display light emitting unit 53. It is possible to correspond to the effect for the game round executed in the speaker unit 54.

The external command at the start of fluctuation is output externally from the main MPU 62. As a result, the function of outputting an external command at the start of fluctuation is fulfilled in the main MPU 62 that controls the progress of the game, so that the function of managing the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be integrated in the main MPU 62.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 stores in advance data that defines the correspondence between the variable command and the external command at the start of the variable. As a result, the main MPU 62 can uniquely read the external command at the start of the fluctuation from the fluctuation command sent by itself to the sound / light side MPU 82, and the processing configuration for outputting the external command at the start of the fluctuation. Is simplified.

The main MPU 62 externally outputs a variable command corresponding to the effect for the game round to the external device EX after the effect for the game round is started. Then, the external display device 301 executes the effect corresponding to the received variable command. As a result, even if the player misses the effect for the game, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to confirm the effect corresponding to the effect for the game.

When the main MPU 62 externally outputs the variable command corresponding to the effect for the game round to the external device EX, the main MPU 62 externally outputs the variable command after the effect for the game round is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the reproduction effect of the external display device 301 and the effect of the game rounds of the symbol display device 41 from overlapping in time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to each production.

Since the variable command is used as it is as a command for executing the reproduction effect on the external device EX, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated command for executing the reproduction effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of commands required for the main MPU 62.

When starting the effect for game rounds, the main MPU 62 not only has a variation command including information on the result of the hit / miss judgment, the result of the distribution judgment, and the display duration, but also the result of the hit / fail judgment and the result of the distribution judgment. The type command including the information of is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. This makes it possible to carefully confirm the result of the hit / miss determination and the result of the distribution determination on the sound / light side MPU 82. In this case, only the variable command is output externally in order to execute the reproduction effect, and the type command is not output. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output externally from the main MPU 62 while enabling the external display device 301 to execute the reproduction effect.

Not only the external command at the start of the fluctuation but also the fluctuation command is externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. This makes it possible to consolidate the functions of externally outputting to the external device EX to the main MPU 62 that controls the progress of the game.

The reproduction effect of the external display device 301 is performed in a situation where the open / close execution mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game in the open / close execution mode. Further, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the reproduction effect performed by the external display device 301 corresponds to the effect for the game round performed before the transition to the open / close execution mode.

The reproduction effect in the external display device 301 is performed in the situation where the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10, and is not performed in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode is executed. .. As a result, it is possible to perform the reproduction effect only when the period for performing the reproduction effect is secured, and it is possible to execute the reproduction effect reasonably.

When a small hit result is obtained in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the content of the effect of the external display device 301 by outputting the external command at the start of the fluctuation and the content of the effect in the symbol display device 41. A situation may occur in which the content of the production for the game round does not match. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not the high probability mode is the low frequency support mode by confirming the correspondence between the two effects in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. It becomes possible to make a prediction, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

By changing the type of the external command at the start of fluctuation to be externally output to the external device EX, the contents of both effects in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 are prevented from matching. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the contents of both effects do not match as described above, while not affecting the contents of the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 41. In particular, in the sound / light side MPU 82, the display duration of the game round is determined according to the variable command received from the main MPU 62, and further, the content of the effect for the game round is determined, so that it is difficult to change the effect content. On the other hand, by responding by changing the type of external command at the start of fluctuation, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased when the contents of both effects are not matched, and the correspondence relationship between the two effects is suitable. It is possible to change to.

By making the discrepancy between the contents of both effects in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 occur triggered by the small hit result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the timing at which the discrepancy may occur. In addition, it is possible to increase the advantage of the small hit result for the player, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the small hit result will be obtained.

In the external display device 301, an effect of notifying in advance the type of reach effect in the symbol display device 41 is performed according to the content of the external command at the start of the fluctuation. In this case, if there is a discrepancy in the contents of both effects in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301, the content of the advance notification in the external display device 301 and the type of reach effect in the symbol display device 41 do not match. Will be. As a result, it is possible not only to notify the player that the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, but also to give the player an unexpected surprise at the time of the notification, and the interest of the game can be improved.

A plurality of external terminals 79a to 79l are provided on the external terminal board 79, and among these, the external terminals 79a to 79i are terminals for externally outputting a signal corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10, and the signal concerned. Is output externally using one terminal. On the other hand, the remaining external terminals 79j to 79l are terminals for externally outputting commands corresponding to the effect of the pachinko machine 10, and the commands are externally output using a plurality of terminals. Since the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the pachinko machine 10 is one, even if there are a plurality of types of states of the pachinko machine 10 to be externally output, the external output can be output. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the information corresponding to the content of the effect is a plurality, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of information output externally.

In the configuration in which the high probability mode ends when the game times of the end reference number of times are exhausted, a plurality of types of the end reference times are set. As a result, the player not only enters the high-probability mode, but also plays the game while expecting to enter the high-probability mode with a larger number of end reference times. Therefore, it is possible to suitably raise the expectation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A plurality of types of termination reference times are set in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. As a result, the player expects not only to be in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, but also to be in the high-probability mode with a larger number of end reference times and to be in the high-frequency support mode. While playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to suitably raise the expectation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, there is a state in which the number of termination reference times is smaller than that in the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the jackpot result, which is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot result will occur.

If an unspecified high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the low-frequency support mode, then the state shifts to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, while the unspecified high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the high-frequency support mode. In the case of a configuration that subsequently shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the number of termination criteria when an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained is larger than that in the case of the advantageous jackpot result A or the advantageous jackpot result B. Is also a large number of times. This makes it possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of unspecified high-accuracy jackpot results.

In the symbol display device 41, the expected degree of the end reference number of times is notified depending on the type of display mode. This makes it possible to suitably increase the expectation that a large number of end reference times are selected.

The notification of the expected degree of the end reference number is performed not only by the symbol display device 41 but also by the external display device 301. As a result, the player expects that a larger number of end reference times is selected while checking both the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. Further, the lottery for determining the notification content of the expectation degree in the symbol display device 41 and the lottery for determining the notification content of the expectation degree in the external display device 301 are performed separately. As a result, there are a plurality of types of information for predicting the end reference number of times, and the player can make a high-level prediction.

The number-corresponding command output externally from the main MPU 62 in order to notify the expected degree of the end reference number in the external display device 301 does not include information specifying the end reference number. This makes it possible to prevent the end reference number of times from being displayed as it is on the external display device 301. Therefore, for example, even if a communication error occurs in the output of the command corresponding to the number of times, it is possible to prevent the abnormal end reference number of times from being specified, and it is difficult for the player to be confused. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the end reference number of times is specified in the external display device 301 even though the pachinko machine 10 does not try to specify the end reference number of times.

The number-of-times corresponding command is output externally after the contents corresponding to the result of the hit / miss determination are displayed on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the external device EX from notifying that a jackpot result will occur prior to the pachinko machine 10.

From the main MPU 62, the external command at the start of the fluctuation and the fluctuation command are externally output to the external device EX at different timings with respect to the effect for one game round. Then, in the external display device 301, an effect corresponding to each command and an effect corresponding to the effect for the game round is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect corresponding to each timing on the external display device 301, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect executed on the external display device 301.

Of the commands externally output to the external device EX, the variable command contains more information about the effect for the game than the external command at the start of the variable. As a result, when a plurality of types of effects are performed on the external display device 301 with respect to the effects for one game round, the contents of the effects of each effect can be significantly different.

While the external command at the start of the fluctuation does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the hit / fail judgment, the change command that is output externally after the content corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment is displayed is the pass / fail. It contains information that clearly indicates the result of the determination. This makes it difficult for the external display device 301 to perform an effect of clearly indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment at the former timing, while at the latter timing, it is possible to perform an effect of clearly indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment. Will be.

<Second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the configuration for transmitting a command to the external device EX is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 39, an electrical configuration for communicating between the pachinko machine 10, the external device EX, and the hall computer HC will be described.

As shown in FIG. 39, the main MPU 62 can transmit various signals to the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79. The type of signal transmitted to this hall computer HC is the same as that of the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the main MPU 62 does not send a command to the external device EX. Instead, the sound-light side MPU 82 can send a command to the external device EX through the external terminal board 79. The transmission of this command is performed by serial communication as in the case where the main MPU 62 transmits the command to the external device EX in the first embodiment.

Here, the sound / light side MPU 82 transmits a command to the display side MPU 92 by serial communication, as in the first embodiment. In this case, the communication method for serial communication from the sound / light side MPU 82 to the external device EX is the same as the communication method for serial communication from the sound / light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92. That is, as a signal line group for transmitting a command from the sound light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92, a signal line for command data transmission, a signal line for a clock signal, and a signal line for a latch signal are provided. However, as a group of signal lines for transmitting a command from the sound / light side MPU 82 to the external device EX, there are a signal line for command data transmission, a signal line for a clock signal, and a signal line for a latch signal. It is provided. Therefore, the sound and light side MPU 82 can transmit the same command as the command to be transmitted to the display side MPU 92 to the external device EX, and can use the data structure for transmitting the command as it is. It becomes.

Next, the main command correspondence process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40.

In the main command correspondence process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a variable command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. When these commands are received, the interlocking effect generation lottery is executed in step S2202, and in the subsequent step S2203, it is determined whether or not the result of the generated lottery is the interlocking effect generation winning. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2203, the command correspondence table is read from the sound / light side ROM 83 in step S2204, and the command corresponding to the change command received this time is started to change from the command correspondence table in step S2205. It is read as an external command of time, and in the following step S2206, the read external command at the start of fluctuation is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. The processing contents of these steps S2202 to S2206 include steps S1701 to S1703, steps S1707, and step S1709 in the external output processing (FIG. 32) at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment. The same is true.

That is, in the present embodiment, the external command at the start of fluctuation is not transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX, but is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX. Along with this, the command correspondence table stored in the main ROM 63 in the first embodiment is stored in the sound light side ROM 83. As in the first embodiment, in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the variable command is used in the game times in which a predetermined event occurs, such as the game times of the small hit result. An external command at the start of an uncorresponding fluctuation may be transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 82 to the external device EX.

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, or if the process of step S2206 is executed, the process for determining the stop result command and the pattern command is executed in step S2207. In this process, the same process as step S1203 to step S1207 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed. In the following step S2208, the stop result command and the pattern command determined in step S2207 are stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. After that, in step S2209, the stop result command and the pattern command determined in step S2207 are transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

When a negative determination is made in step S2201, or after the process of step S2209 is executed, it is determined in step S2210 whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If the opening command has been received, the opening correspondence process is executed in step S2211, and the opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the following step S2212. The processing contents of these steps S2211 and S2212 are the same as those of step S1212 and step S1213 of the main command correspondence processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

In the following step S2213, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2213, the reproduction lottery process is executed in step S2214, and it is determined in step S2215 whether or not the reproduction is won. If the reproduction is won, in step S2216, the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the game round immediately before the opening / closing execution mode this time are transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication, and at the same time. The first opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. As a result, the external MPU 312 starts the opening effect of the open / close execution mode on the external display device 301, and after the end of the opening effect, the effect performed on the symbol display device 41 in the immediately preceding game round. , The external display device 301 is displayed and controlled so that the reproduction effect of the game times is performed by the external display device 301.

In particular, since the stop result command and the pattern command based on the contents of the advance notice lottery process and the stop symbol determination process are output externally instead of the variable command, the external MPU 312 has the symbol display device 41. It becomes possible to specify the entire contents of the effect of the executed game round. Therefore, in the reproduction effect, it is possible to reproduce an effect having exactly the same contents as the effect for the game round executed by the symbol display device 41.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2213 or a negative determination is made in step S2215, the second opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication in step S2217. As a result, the external MPU 312 displays and controls the external display device 301 so that the normal bonus effect is performed.

When the process of step S2216 or step S2217 is executed, the process corresponding to the main command is terminated after the other processes are executed in step S2218. In the other processing, the same processing as in steps S1209 to S1210 and steps S1214 to S1228 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed.

Next, the display side command correspondence process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41 (a). The display-side command correspondence process is executed in step S1104 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21).

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the exit command of the specific character has been received from the display side MPU 92. The exit command of the specific character is transmitted from the display side MPU 92 to the sound light side MPU 82 at the timing during the execution of the predetermined game rotation effect. The predetermined game rotation effect is an effect in which the specific character is variablely displayed until the middle timing on the symbol display device 41, and the specific character is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at the timing when the exit command of the specific character is transmitted. It is the timing when it will not be done. If the exit command has been received, the exit command is externally output to the external device EX by serial communication in step S2302.

When a negative determination is made in step S2301 or when the process of step S2302 is executed, the process corresponding to the command on the display side is terminated after the other processes are executed in step S2303. In the other processing, the processing corresponding to the other command transmitted from the display side MPU 92 is executed.

Next, the specific character effect control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41 (b). The effect control process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated in the external MPU 312.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the exit command has been received from the sound / light side MPU 82. If the exit command has not been received, the effect control process is terminated as it is, and if the exit command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, the effect table for the specific character is read from the program ROM 313 and written to the work RAM 314, and then the effect control process is terminated. As a result, the external MPU 312 outputs an internal command to the external VDP 315 each time the image update timing is reached according to the effect table for the specific character. When the external VDP315 outputs a signal according to the internal command, the external display device 301 performs an effect using the specific character.

Next, a state in which the effect using the specific character is performed in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

42 (a) shows the execution period of the game rotation effect in the symbol display device 41, FIG. 42 (b) shows the execution period of the specific character effect in the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 42 (c) shows the external display. The execution period of the game rotation effect in the device 301 is shown, and FIG. 42 (d) shows the execution period of the specific character effect in the external display device 301. Further, FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B) show a state in which the specific character effect is executed by the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301.

By starting the game round at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (c), the game round effect is started in each of the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. To. After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 42B, the symbol display device 41 starts the specific character effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), the specific character CH3 is variablely displayed in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the specific character CH3 is not displayed on the external display device 301.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the specific character effect in the symbol display device 41 is terminated, the specific character CH3 disappears from the symbol display device 41, and is shown in FIG. 42 (d). As described above, the specific character effect in the external display device 301 is started, and the specific character CH3 appears in the external display device 301. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), the specific character CH3 is variablely displayed on the external display device 301. In this case, the symbol display device 41 continues to display the fluctuation of the symbol, but the specific character CH3 is not displayed.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the specific character effect in the external display device 301 is completed, and at the timing of t5 thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (c). As described above, the game rotation effect in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 is completed.

In addition, in the game times in which the specific character CH3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the degree of expectation of transition to the open / close execution mode and the degree of expectation of occurrence of reach are higher than in the game times in which the specific character CH3 is not displayed. The winning probability of the production is set. Further, in the game times in which the specific character CH3 is displayed on the external display device 301 after the specific character CH3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the specific character CH3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 and specified on the external display device 301. The winning probability of the effect is set so that the degree of expectation of transition to the open / close execution mode and the degree of expectation of occurrence of reach are higher than the game times in which the character CH3 is not displayed.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The command for executing the effect corresponding to the effect for the game round in the external device EX is output not from the main side MPU 62 but from the sound light side MPU 82. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 62. Further, although the main content of the effect for the game round is determined by the main MPU 62, the detailed content of the effect for the game round is determined by the sound light side MPU 82. In this case, by outputting the command to the external device EX on the sound / light side MPU 82, the command can be output so that the entire content of the effect for the game round can be specified. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible for the external display device 301 to perform an effect related to the entire content of the effect for the game round.

As a command for executing the reproduction effect on the external display device 301, a stop result command and a pattern command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 when the immediately preceding game round is started are output. As a result, not only the result of the hit / fail judgment included in the variable command, the result of the distribution judgment and the display duration, but also the content of the advance notice lottery process and the content of the stop symbol determination process executed in the sound / light side MPU 82 are supported. The command can be externally output to the external device EX, and in the reproduction effect, it is possible to reproduce exactly the same content as the content of the effect for the game round that was executed immediately before.

Further, since the stop result command and the pattern command are output as they are as described above, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated command for executing the reproduction effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of commands.

In the configuration in which the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted from the sound light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 by serial communication, the stop result command and the pattern command are externally output from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX by serial communication. .. This makes it possible to externally output the stop result command and the pattern command by using the processing configuration for transmitting the command to the display side MPU 92. Therefore, the processing configuration for outputting the command to the outside can be simplified.

The exit command was externally output from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX in accordance with the timing when the specific character CH3 was not displayed in the symbol display device 41, and the exit command was externally output from the external display device 301. At the same time, the display of the specific character CH3 is started. As a result, it becomes possible to perform an effect related to each other as if the specific character CH3 is moving between the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301, and the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 can be produced. It is possible to increase the player's attention to both of them. Further, since the exit command is output not from the main MPU 62 but from the sound / light side MPU 82 that controls the execution of the effect, it is easy to specify the output timing of the exit command, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. Is planned.

In the configuration in which the command corresponding to the content of the effect is externally output from the sound / light side MPU 82 as described above, the signal corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 is externally output from the main side MPU 62. As a result, the main body of the external output can be distributed according to the functions of the MPUs 62 and 82, and the external output can be suitably performed.

The same external terminal board 79 is used regardless of whether the main MPU 62 outputs an external output or the sound / light side MPU 82 outputs an external output. As a result, it becomes possible to consolidate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 on the external terminal board 79, and it becomes easy to perform wiring work for external output.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment and the second embodiment, both the main MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 82 transmit signals to the external device EX. However, the sound and light side MPU 82 sends a command to the external device EX by serial communication as in the second embodiment, whereas the main side MPU 62 does not send a command to the external device EX. A fluctuation start signal is transmitted using a single signal line. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for outputting a signal to the external device EX in the main MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 82 will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the external output processing at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In step S2501, the lottery for generating the interlocking effect is executed, and in the subsequent step S2502, it is determined whether or not the result of the generated lottery is the winning of the interlocking effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2502, the external output process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503.

In step S2503, the command correspondence table is read from the main ROM 63, and in the following step S2504, the content of the variable command output this time to the sound / light side MPU 82 is specified. After that, in step S2505, it is determined whether or not the game times this time are the game times corresponding to the small hit result, and in step S2506, it is a state of high probability mode and low frequency support mode. Judge whether or not. As a result of each of these determination processes, if the high probability mode is in the low frequency support mode and the current game round is a small hit result, the process proceeds to step S2508, and in other cases, the step is performed. Proceed to S2507.

The processing contents of steps S2501 to S2506 are the same as those of steps S1701 to S1706 of the external output processing (FIG. 32) at the start of fluctuation in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, in the command correspondence table, the external command at the start of the fluctuation is not set in a one-to-one correspondence with the fluctuation command, but the fluctuation is made in a one-to-one correspondence with the fluctuation command. The ON duration of the start signal is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the content of the interlocking effect can be specified by the external MPU 312 by changing the ON duration of the fluctuation start signal.

In step S2507, the ON duration corresponding to the variable command output this time to the sound / light side MPU 82 is read from the command correspondence table. On the other hand, in step S2508, the ON continuation period set on the lower side by one address with respect to the ON continuation period corresponding to the variable command output this time to the sound light side MPU 82 is read from the command correspondence table. Here, in the command correspondence table, the common effect content of the variable command set on the lower side of one address for one variable command is different from the common effect content of the former variable command. In addition to being set, the common effect content is an effect content that cannot be selected by the sound / light side MPU 82 based on the former variable command. Therefore, in step S2508, the ON continuation period corresponding to the variation command whose effect content does not match the variation command transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 in this game round is selected.

After executing the process of step S2507 or step S2508, the process proceeds to step S2509, and the fluctuation start signal is transmitted to the external device EX in the ON continuation period selected in step S2507 or step S2508. After that, the external output process is terminated.

On the external MPU 312, a data table corresponding to the ON duration of the fluctuation start signal is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314, and the effect corresponding to the read data table is executed by the external display device 301. Outputs an internal command to the external VDP315. As a result, when the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the ON continuation period selected in step S2507, a notice effect regarding the content of the effect for the game round executed by the symbol display device 41 is externally attached. It is executed by the display device 301. On the other hand, when the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the ON continuation period selected in step S2508, the content of the effect for game rounds executed by the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. By causing a discrepancy with the interlocking effect of the game times to be executed, the player is notified that the mode is in the high probability mode.

Next, the main command correspondence process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62. When these commands are received, the process for determining the stop result command and the pattern command is executed in step S2602, and the stop result command and the pattern command determined in the step S2602 are executed in the following step S2603. Is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, and in step S2604, the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 92. The processing contents of these steps S2602 to S2604 are the same as those of steps S2207 to S2209 of the main command correspondence processing (FIG. 40) in the second embodiment.

When a negative determination is made in step S2601 or when the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined in step S2605 whether or not an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62. If the opening command has been received, the opening correspondence process is executed in step S2606, and the opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the subsequent step S2607.

In the following step S2608, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is the high frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2608, the reproduction lottery process is executed in step S2609, and it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the reproduction is won. If the reproduction is won, the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the game round immediately before the opening / closing execution mode of this time are transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication in step S2611. The first opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. As a result, the external MPU 312 starts the opening effect of the open / close execution mode on the external display device 301, and after the end of the opening effect, the effect performed on the symbol display device 41 in the immediately preceding game round. , The external display device 301 is displayed and controlled so that the reproduction effect of the game times is performed by the external display device 301.

On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S2608 or the negative determination is made in step S2610, the second opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication in step S2612. As a result, the external MPU 312 displays and controls the external display device 301 so that the normal bonus effect is performed.

When the process of step S2611 or step S2612 is executed, after executing other processes in step S2613, the main command corresponding process is terminated. The processing contents of steps S2605 to S2613 are the same as those of steps S2210 to S2218 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 40) in the second embodiment.

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Regarding the execution of the reproduction effect in the external device EX, the same effect as that of the second embodiment is obtained.

While the command for executing the reproduction effect in the external device EX is output externally from the sound / light side MPU 82, when the effect for the game round is started, the effect corresponding to the effect is displayed on the external display device 301. The information to be performed in is output externally from the main MPU 62. Since the timing at which the game times occur is arbitrary and the content of the effect for the game times is also arbitrary, it is not possible to prepare the contents to be output externally in advance. In this case, the external output of the information when starting the effect for the game times is performed by the main MPU 62 existing on the upstream side of the control, so that the interlocking effect of the game times on the external display device 301 can be performed at an early stage. It will be possible to start. Further, the function of externally outputting to the external device EX can be distributed according to the functions of the MPUs 62 and 82.

When the sound / light side MPU 82 externally outputs information corresponding to the effect for the game round, the main side MPU 62 outputs the information as a command using a plurality of terminals of the external terminal board 79, whereas the main side MPU 62 is used for the game round. When the information corresponding to the effect is output to the outside, only one terminal of the external terminal board 79 is used to output the information to the outside as a signal. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of information output externally.

The main MPU 62 changes the type of information to be externally output to the external device EX by changing the ON duration of the fluctuation start signal. This makes it possible to externally output a plurality of types of information even when externally outputting using one terminal.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, unlike each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with the symbol display device 41. Instead, the external display device 301 of the external device EX fulfills the function of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX in the present embodiment.

Similar to each of the above embodiments, the external device EX is provided above the pachinko machine 10. In each of the above embodiments, the external device EX is provided in a fixed manner, whereas in the present embodiment, the external device EX is provided in a movable manner. The external device EX is provided with a pair of left and right movable arms 321 and 322, and the moving direction is regulated by the movable arms 321 and 322 so that the external device EX can move in the vertical direction. It has become. Then, the external device EX is placed on the pachinko machine 10 on the window panel 52 at an initial position above the pachinko machine 10 so as not to overlap the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction and at a position adjacent to the window panel 52 of the pachinko machine 10. It can be displaced from the front to the opposite position during use.

When the external device EX is arranged at the use position, the display surface of the external display device 301 is arranged at a position including the vertical center position and the horizontal center position of the window panel 52. In this case, there are non-opposed regions of the window panel 52 above, laterally, and below the external display device 301, and each of these non-opposed regions is located in the gaming area PA on which the game ball flows down on the game board 24. On the other hand, it faces from the front. That is, the external display device 301 exists in the central region of the game area PA.

The external display device 301 is formed by using a transparent liquid crystal display so that the rear side of the external display device 301 can be seen through. Therefore, even when the external display device 301 is arranged at the position when it is used, the window panel 52 facing the rear thereof and the gaming area PA facing the rear thereof can be seen through.

On the front surface of the external device EX, a plurality of external operation units 302 are provided on the side of the display surface of the external display device 301. All of these external operation units 302 are arranged outside the window panel 52 so as not to face the window panel 52 from the front in the situation where the external device EX is arranged at the position in use. Further, an external control board 311 is built in a side portion of the external device EX on the side where the external operation unit 302 is provided. The area where the external control board 311 is provided is a position that does not face the window panel 52 from the front in the situation where the external device EX is arranged at the time of use, and is on the side of the window panel 52 in the front door frame 14. It is a position facing the square area from the front.

Next, the configuration of the game board 24 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

Unlike each of the above embodiments, the game board 24 is not provided with the symbol display device 41. Instead, a large number of nails 24b are provided at the positions where the symbol display device 41 is provided. This makes it possible to diversify the flow mode of the game ball in the game area PA as compared with each of the above embodiments.

A stage unit 325 is provided above the first operating port 33 in the game area PA. On the upper side of the stage unit 325, a ball entry section 326 that allows the inflow of game balls into the stage unit 325 is provided, and the game ball that has entered the ball entry section 326 is provided in the stage unit 325. Roll laterally on stage 327. Then, the game ball discharged from the lateral center position of the stage 327 to the outside of the stage unit 325 wins a prize in the first operating port 33 as compared with the game ball discharged from another position of the stage unit 325. It's getting easier.

In the situation where the external device EX is arranged at the position in use, the external display device 301 is present in the area where the nail 24b is provided in the game area PA and in front of the stage unit 325. As described above, since the external display device 301 is formed of a transparent liquid crystal display, the gaming area PA and the stage unit located behind the external device EX even when the external device EX is arranged at the position when it is used. The 325 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, an electrical configuration for communicating between the pachinko machine 10, the external device EX, and the hall computer HC will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47, the main MPU 62 can transmit various signals to the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79. The type of signal transmitted to this hall computer HC is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, the main MPU 62 can transmit a command to the external device EX by serial communication through the external terminal board 79. The communication method of this serial communication is the same as that of the first embodiment.

Further, the main MPU 62 can transmit a command to the sound light side MPU 82 by serial communication. The communication method of this serial communication is the same as the communication method when the command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. Specifically, the command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound / optical side MPU 82. As the signal line group of, a signal line for command data transmission, a signal line for a clock signal, and a signal line for a latch signal are provided.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display control device 90 is not provided in response to the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with the symbol display device 41. Therefore, the sound / light side MPU 82 controls the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 based on the command received from the main side MPU 62, but does not transmit the command to the lower side. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the sound / light side MPU 82 determines the effect content regarding the execution time of the effect corresponding to the command based on the command received from the main MPU 62, but the data corresponding to the entire execution time. The table is read out by the display side MPU 92, and the execution control of the effect in a part of the effect range of the execution times is performed in the sound light side MPU 82 based on the command transmitted from the display side MPU 92 according to the data table. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, based on the command received from the main MPU 62, the production content for the execution time of the effect corresponding to the command is determined, and the data table corresponding to the entire execution time is sounded. It is read by the optical side MPU 82, and the execution control of the effect is performed by the sound light side MPU 82 according to the read data table.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with the symbol display device 41, and instead, the external display device 301 of the external device EX fulfills the function of the symbol display device 41. Corresponding to this, the program ROM 313 of the external device EX stores a program and fixed value data that enable the external display device 301 to perform an effect corresponding to the command transmitted from the main MPU 62. ing. Further, in relation to the function of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments being fulfilled in the external display device 301, the content of the effect executed by the external display device 301 includes the display light emitting unit 53 and the display light emitting unit 53. It needs to be related to the content of the effect executed by the speaker unit 54. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main MPU 62 transmits the same command as the command transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 to the external MPU 312.

For example, when the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light side MPU 82 at the start of the game round, the same variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312. To. Further, when the opening command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound / light side MPU 82 at the start of the open / close execution mode, the same opening command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312. The type of command transmitted from the main MPU 62 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

When the external MPU 312 receives a command from the main MPU 62, the data table corresponding to the command is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314. Then, by generating and outputting an internal command to the external VDP 315 according to the contents of the data table, the external display device 301 is made to execute the display effect according to the contents of the data table. This data table corresponds to the data table read from the same command in the sound light side MPU 82. For example, in the case of a game round data table, the data table read out in the external side MPU 312 and the sound light side MPU 82 The display duration of the game times is the same as that of the data table read in. Then, when the data table for the game round is read out, the external display device 301 performs the variable display of the symbol over the display duration determined by the main MPU 62. The content of the variable display of the symbol is the same as the display content of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the effect content is independently determined by each of the sound light side MPU 82 and the external side MPU 312 based on the command transmitted from the main side MPU 62. In this case, if the degree of freedom in determining the effect content is high, the effect content executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 and the effect content executed by the external display device 301 are inconsistent. May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even the detailed contents of the production are determined in the main MPU 62. For example, in the case of an effect for game rounds, the advance notice lottery process (step S1204) and the effect pattern determination process (step S1206) executed in the sound / light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment are executed in the main MPU 62. Then, a variable command based on the processing results is transmitted to each of the sound light side MPU 82 and the external side MPU 312.

As described above, the external device EX is provided with an external operation unit 302 operated by the player to display various information. Corresponding to this, the program ROM 313 stores a program and fixed value data for displaying various information on the external display device 301 according to the operation of the external operation unit 302.

Next, the command output process executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. The command output process includes the fraud detection process (step S205), the input state monitoring process (step S212), the special figure special electric control process (step S213), and the normal figure normal electric shown in the first embodiment. It is executed when it becomes necessary to transmit a command from the main MPU 62 to the sound light side MPU 82 in the control process (step S214).

First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the command. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the command output process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702. In step S2702, the command corresponding to the output timing of this time is read from the main ROM 63, and in the following step S2703, the read command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 by serial communication, and in step S2704, the sound light is concerned. The same command as the command sent to the side MPU 82 is externally output to the external device EX by serial communication. After that, this command output processing ends.

Next, the external control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. The external control process is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) started in the external MPU 312.

In the external control process, first, in step S2801, the main command storage process is executed. The main command storage process is a process for storing the command in the work RAM 314 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The work RAM 314 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored and stored in the ring buffer. It is read out sequentially according to the order.

In the following step S2802, the main command corresponding process is executed. In the main command correspondence process, the data table corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314.

In the following step S2803, the hall side information corresponding to the signal received from the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC is stored in the work RAM 314. The signal received from the MPU 201 is a signal corresponding to a signal externally output to the hall computer HC from the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the external device EX. Information, information on the number of times the game has been executed, information on the number of game balls to be paid out, and the like are transmitted to the external device EX.

In the following step S2804, the display control process is executed. In the display control process, an internal command is output to the external VDP315 every time the image is updated according to the data table read out to the work RAM 314. The external VDP 315 outputs an image signal to the external display device 301 according to the received internal command. As a result, the external display device 301 executes the display effect corresponding to the data table. The processing content of the display control processing is the same as the processing content of the task processing in step S1305 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 24) of the display side MPU 92 in the first embodiment.

After that, in step S2805, it is determined whether or not the external operation unit 302 has been manually operated, and in step S2806, it is determined whether or not the game rotation or opening / closing execution mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2805 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, the external control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 and a negative determination is made in step S2806, the operation-corresponding control process is executed in step S2807, and then the external control process is terminated. In the operation-compatible control process, a process for displaying various information corresponding to the operation of the external operation unit 302 on the external display device 301 is executed.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The pachinko machine 10 is not equipped with the symbol display device 41, and instead, the external display device 301 fulfills the function of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments. As a result, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Further, since the symbol display device 41 is not provided in the game area PA, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the game ball flows down in the game area PA. This makes it possible to diversify the flow mode of the game ball.

In a configuration in which the symbol display device 41 and the display control device 90 are not provided, the voice emission control device 80 is provided. As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the voice light emitting control device 80. In this case, the main MPU 62 externally outputs the same command as the command transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 to the external MPU 312. As a result, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 can execute the display effect corresponding to the display effect executed by the external display device 301. In addition, it is possible to use both commands, and it is possible to reduce the types of commands.

The external device EX is displaceably provided at a position facing the window portion 51 in front of the window portion 51 of the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to play the game with the visibility of the external display device 301 improved.

Further, since the external display device 301 is formed of a transparent liquid crystal display, even if the external display device 301 is arranged in front of the window portion 51, the player can see the flow mode of the game ball in the game area PA. It becomes possible to make it visible.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing content of the effect pattern determination process executed in step S1206 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) in the sound / light side MPU 82 is different from each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a process of determining an effect pattern.

First, in step S2901, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the loop effect in this game round is executed. The loop effect is an effect of displaying a special character as an effect for a game round, in which the type of the special character is different among a plurality of game rounds and the special character is displayed among a plurality of game rounds. When the types are different, the effects are changed in a predetermined order and the change laps in the predetermined order are repeated. More specifically, when the special character A, the special character B, and the special character C are set as the special characters, the special character A is selected in one game to be executed by the loop effect. If this is the case, the special character B is selected in the game times that are the target of the execution of the loop effect, the special character C is selected in the game times that are the target of the execution of the loop effect, and then the special character C is selected. In the game round, the special character A is selected. Then, the change laps in a predetermined order are repeated for the selection of the type of the special character, such as special character A → special character B → special character C → special character A → special character B → ....

In the following step S2902, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2901 is the winning of the loop effect. If the loop effect is won, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the value of the loop effect counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 is greater than 2. The loop effect counter is a counter for determining which special character is used when executing the loop effect. Specifically, when the value of the loop effect counter is "0", the special character A is selected, and when the value of the loop effect counter is "1", the special character B is selected, and the loop effect counter. When the value of is "2", the special character C is selected.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, the value of the loop effect counter is cleared to "0" in step S2904. When a negative determination is made in step S2903, or when the process of step S2904 is executed, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Further, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not the game round this time is a small hit result.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2905, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2906, in step S2907, a special character of the type corresponding to the value of the current loop effect counter is used for this loop effect. Select as a character. As a result, in this game, the loop effect is performed using the special character of the type corresponding to the value of the loop effect counter.

On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in both steps S2905 and S2906, that is, if the game times result in a small hit in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game times are in step S2908. , A special character of the type corresponding to the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the current loop effect counter is selected as the character for this loop effect. For example, when the value of the current loop effect counter is "1", the special character C corresponding to the case where the value of the loop effect counter is "2" is selected, and the value of the current loop effect counter is "2". When it is "2", the special character A corresponding to the case where the value of the loop effect counter is "0" is selected. As a result, the rule is broken in the selection order of the special characters in the loop effect, and it is possible to notify the player that the mode is in the high probability mode.

When the process of step S2907 or step S2908 is executed, the value of the loop effect counter is incremented by 1 in step S2909. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, or if the process of step S2909 is executed, the process of determining the effect pattern is terminated after the other processes are executed in step S2910. In other processes, regarding the determination of the effect pattern, the process for determining the contents other than the contents related to the loop effect is executed.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, when a small hit result is obtained in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the law of the selection order of the special characters in the loop effect is broken. Will be. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode by utilizing the occurrence of the breaking of the law. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the loop effect.

In addition, by performing the above notification when the small hit result is obtained, it is possible to increase the advantage of the small hit result and raise the player's expectation for the small hit result. It will be possible.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing content of the effect pattern determination process executed in step S1206 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 22) in the sound / light side MPU 82 is different from each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a process of determining an effect pattern.

First, in step S3001, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in this game round is executed. The pre-notice effect is a situation in which the symbols are variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the symbols are displayed on standby in one symbol row Z1 and the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows Z1 and Z2. In a situation, it is an effect of displaying a notice character in order to notify the degree of expectation that a reach effect will occur and the degree of expectation that a hit result will occur in the game times. A plurality of types of the notice characters are set so as to include at least a character having a one-to-one correspondence with the type of reach effect, and when the notice character corresponding to the type of reach effect is displayed, it is basic. In that game, a reach effect corresponding to the notice character is generated.

In the following step S3002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3001 is the winning of the pre-notice effect. If the pre-notice effect is won, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, the type of reach effect to be executed in the current game round is grasped from the content of the variable command received this time. In the following step S3004, the type of the advance notice character corresponding to the type of reach effect grasped in step S3003 is grasped.

After that, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode is in the low frequency support mode, and in step S3006, it is determined whether or not this game is a small hit result. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S3005, or if a negative determination is made in step S3006, a pre-notice effect for displaying the type of advance notice character grasped in step S3004 is set in step S3007. As a result, in this game, after the pre-notice effect in which the predetermined advance notice character is displayed is executed, the reach effect corresponding to the predetermined advance notice character, for example, the reach effect in which the predetermined advance notice character appears is executed. To.

On the other hand, when an affirmative judgment is made in both steps S3005 and S3006, that is, when the game times result in a small hit in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game times are in step S3008. , A pre-notice effect in which a different type of notice character from the type of notice character grasped in step S3004 is displayed is set. As a result, in this game, after the pre-notice effect in which the predetermined advance notice character is displayed is executed, a reach effect that does not correspond to the predetermined advance notice character, for example, a reach effect in which the predetermined advance notice character does not appear is executed. Will be done. In this case, the rule breaks between the advance notice effect and the reach effect, and it is possible to notify the player that the mode is in the high probability mode.

When the process of step S3007 or step S3008 is executed, the process of determining the effect pattern is terminated after the other processes are executed in step S3009. In other processes, regarding the determination of the effect pattern, the process for determining the contents other than the contents related to the loop effect is executed.

According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, when a small hit result is obtained in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the law of the correspondence between the notice character and the reach effect character. Will collapse. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode by utilizing the occurrence of the breaking of the law. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the effect using the notice character.

In addition, by performing the above notification when the small hit result is obtained, it is possible to increase the advantage of the small hit result and raise the player's expectation for the small hit result. It will be possible.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) Information may be externally output from the pachinko machine 10 to the external device EX so that the effect corresponding to the effect of the opening / closing execution mode in the pachinko machine 10 is executed. In this case, for example, as an effect of the opening / closing execution mode, the stop result in the mode in which it is not possible to specify which of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode is the jackpot result on the symbol display device 41 in the effect for the game round is obtained. When a promotion effect is performed that may be displayed and clearly indicate that the transition to the high probability mode is supported during the open / close execution mode, the effect corresponding to the promotion effect is displayed externally. The configuration may be performed by the device 301. In this case, the external display device 301 may be configured to display the content indicating the degree of expectation made in the promotion effect by displaying clearly indicating that the transition to the high probability mode is supported.

(2) Regarding the interlocking effect of the game times executed by the external display device 301 based on the external command at the start of the fluctuation output from the pachinko machine 10 or the fluctuation start signal, a lottery for whether or not to execute the interlocking effect is sent to the pachinko machine 10 side. Instead of the configuration in which the execution is performed, the lottery for whether or not the execution is performed may be performed on the external device EX side. Further, the pachinko machine 10 side and the external device EX may be configured to perform the lottery for whether or not the execution is performed.

Further, the interlocking effect of the game times is configured to be executed with a predetermined probability when a predetermined reach effect is executed in the effect for the game times in the symbol display device 41, or when the predetermined reach effect is executed. May be.

(3) The external command at the start of fluctuation may be a command including a part of the data included in the fluctuation command. For example, as in the first embodiment, the variable command is set with the identification data for indicating that it is the variable command by the data of the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data. The lottery result data corresponding to the results of the hit / fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process is set by the next 4-bit data, and the time data corresponding to the display duration is set by the remaining 8-bit data. In the configured configuration, time data may be extracted from the fluctuation command, and data indicating that the fluctuation start data may be added to the time data as the fluctuation start external command. In this case, in the external device EX, the common effect content can be specified from the time data indicating the display duration, so that the external display device 301 can produce the game rounds based on the external command at the start of the fluctuation. It is possible to execute the production corresponding to.

(4) The external command at the start of fluctuation may include data indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment, or in addition to or in place of the external command, the data showing the result of the distribution judgment may be included. good. Further, as an external command at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation command may be used as it is. In this case, the variable command can be used as it is, so that the data capacity can be reduced.

(5) Data indicating the contents of the effect common to the effects for game rounds that can be derived from the change command may be set in the change command. In this case, the data of the common effect content may be extracted from the change command, and the data indicating that the command is an external command at the start of the change may be added to the external command at the start of the change. This makes it possible to use the fluctuation command when deriving the external command at the start of the fluctuation.

(6) As an external command at the start of fluctuation, a command indicating that a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit result is executed is output externally, but a premium effect that confirms that a big hit result is executed is executed. The command indicating that may be configured so that it is not output externally. This makes it possible to prevent an external command indicating that a jackpot result is output as an external command at the start of fluctuation.

(7) In the interlocking effect of the external display device 301, the same or corresponding character as the character displayed in the reach effect of the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 41 is displayed before the start of the reach effect. However, instead of this, the character may be displayed at the same time as the start of the reach effect or after the start of the reach effect. In this case, the interlocking effect does not function as a pre-notification effect of the content of the reach effect on the symbol display device 41, but functions as an emphasis effect on the content of the reach effect on the symbol display device 41.

(8) The command for executing the interlocking effect on the external display device 301 may be configured to be externally output from the display side MPU 92. For example, the stop result command and the pattern command received from the sound and light side MPU 82 may be externally output from the display side MPU 92, and one of the stop result command and the pattern command, more specifically, only the pattern command is displayed. It may be configured to be output externally from the side MPU 92. Further, the command corresponding to the stop result command and the pattern command and corresponding to a part of the effect range of the effect for the game round may be output externally from the display side MPU 92.

(9) In order to execute the interlocking effect on the external display device 301, the stop result command and the pattern command may be externally output from the sound / light side MPU 82, and one of the stop result command and the pattern command may be used. More specifically, only the pattern command may be externally output from the sound / light side MPU 82.

(10) In the first embodiment, at least one of the advance notice lottery process and the stop symbol determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 may be executed by the main side MPU 62. For example, by executing the stop symbol determination process on the main MPU 62, the variable command includes the information of the stop symbol. Then, when the variable command is externally output to the external device EX, the stop symbol of the symbol display device 41 can be grasped by the external MPU 312 of the external device EX, so that the external display can be displayed. When the device 301 executes the reproduction effect of the game times, it is possible to make the type of the final stop symbol or the reach symbol correspond to the effect for the game times.

Further, by executing not only the stop symbol determination process but also the advance notice lottery process on the main MPU 62, the information for the entire effect of the game round is included in the variable command. Then, when the variable command is externally output to the external device EX, the external MPU 312 can grasp the entire effect of the game round, so that the external display device 301 can be used for the game. When executing the reproduction effect of the times, it is possible to reproduce the entire effect for the game times.

(11) In order to execute the reproduction effect of the game times on the external display device 301, the variable command may be externally output from the sound / light side MPU 82. Further, in order to execute the reproduction effect of the game times on the external display device 301, the stop result command and the pattern command may be externally output from the display side MPU 92. Further, in order to execute the reproduction effect of the game times on the external display device 301, either the stop result command or the pattern command from the sound light side MPU 82 or the display side MPU 92, more specifically, only the pattern command is output externally. It may be configured to be.

(12) When there is an open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is different as the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, the external display device 301 reproduces the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is a predetermined number or more. It may be a configuration in which the production can be executed. For example, if there is an open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the number of round games is 16 times and an open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode of 8 times, the latter open / close execution mode produces a reproduction effect. On the other hand, in the former open / close execution mode, the reproduction effect may be executed.

(13) The effect for the game round in which the display duration is a predetermined time or less may be configured to be the execution target of the reproduction effect on the external display device 301. For example, in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode, the reference time on the high frequency side is set corresponding to it, and the effect for the game round of the display duration that is equal to or less than the reference time on the high frequency side is reproduced. Make it the target of the production. In addition, if it is the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the reference time on the low frequency side corresponding to it is set, and the production for the game round of the display duration that is equal to or less than the reference time on the low frequency side is reproduced. Make it the target of the production. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the reproduction effect will be executed.

(14) In the reproduction effect of the external display device 301, only a part of the effect range in the effect for game rounds may be executed. For example, the effect range after the symbol is displayed on standby in the first symbol string in the switching order to the standby display may be executed, or the effect range after the start of the reach effect may be executed. The effect range after the start of the super reach effect may be executed.

(15) In the reproduction effect of the external display device 301, only the character displayed in the reach effect in the effect for game rounds may be displayed, and the variable display of the symbol or the reach effect itself may not be reproduced. In this case, the external command at the start of fluctuation, which is externally output to execute the interlocking effect on the external display device 301, may be externally output to execute the reproduction effect on the external display device 301. good.

(16) The output timing of the command externally output from the pachinko machine 10 in order to execute the reproduction effect on the external display device 301 is not limited to the start of the open / close execution mode, and is used in the effect for the game round. The measurement of the final stop time may be started, the final stop time may have elapsed, the opening effect of the open / close execution mode may be in progress, and the timing at which the first opening round of the special electric winning device 32 is started. It may be after that.

(17) When the display effect of the reproduction effect is executed by the external display device 301, the sound output may be reproduced accordingly. In this case, the sound output for the reproduction effect may be performed by the external device EX, or may be performed by the speaker unit 54 of the pachinko machine 10.

(18) The effect of breaking the law in which the content of the effect for the game times on the symbol display device 41 and the content of the interlocking effect on the external display device 301 do not match is not the game times that resulted in a small hit, but a predetermined reach. It may be configured to occur in the game times when the effect is generated and the result is disengaged. In this case, it is possible to provide an effect of breaking the law as compensation for the deviation of the reach effect. Further, the effect is enhanced by making the configuration occur when the reach effect exceeding a predetermined degree of expectation is deviated.

(19) In the effect of breaking the law in which the content of the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 41 and the content of the interlocking effect in the external display device 301 do not match, the number of times the game round is continued in the situation where the jackpot result does not occur is It may be configured to occur when the number of times exceeds the reference number. In this case, it is possible to provide an effect of breaking the law as compensation for the fact that the jackpot result does not occur continuously.

(20) Although the content of the effect for playing games on the symbol display device 41 and the content of the interlocking effect on the external display device 301 do not usually match, it is notified that the mode is a high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. It may be configured so that the contents of both productions match as the rule of the case is broken.

(21) The content of the interlocking effect executed by the external display device 301 to produce the effect of breaking the law in which the content of the effect for the game round in the symbol display device 41 and the content of the interlocking effect in the external display device 301 do not match. Instead of adjusting the above, the configuration may be performed by adjusting the content of the effect for the game round executed by the symbol display device 41.

(22) In a situation where the effect for the game round is executed in the symbol display device 41, the effect exactly the same as the effect for the game round may be executed in the external display device 301. For example, when the exact match effect is performed, it may be configured to determine the occurrence of a reach effect that exceeds a predetermined degree of expectation, or it may be configured to determine the occurrence of a jackpot result, which is a high probability mode. The configuration may be such that the occurrence of the jackpot result, which is the high frequency support mode, is confirmed. In addition, as the interlocking effect of the external display device 301, an effect corresponding to the entire effect for the game round is performed as described above, and as a reproduction effect of the external display device 301, a part of the effect range in the effect for the game round is performed. It may be configured so that the production corresponding to the above is performed.

(23) In the fourth embodiment, instead of the configuration in which various commands are externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312, various commands are externally output from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external MPU 312. May be. In this case, a command based on the contents of the advance notice lottery process and the stop symbol determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 is externally output to the external side MPU 312, and the sound light side MPU 82 corresponds to the externally output command. The display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are controlled in the above-described manner. Therefore, the display light emitting unit 53 can execute the light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect for the game round in the external display device 301, and the speaker unit 54 can perform the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect. It is possible to do it.

(24) In the fourth embodiment, when the external device EX is used by retracting the upper region of the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 in the middle position in the vertical direction to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 from the lower region. When arranged at the position, the window panel 52 may be configured so as to be able to move the position of the external device EX to the inner side while preventing the window panel 52 from interfering with the external device EX.

(25) In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may not be equipped with the speaker unit 54, and the sound output function may be performed by the external device EX. In this case, since the display effect and the sound output effect are executed in the external device EX, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be further simplified.

(26) The reference number of terminations of the high probability mode is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of termination criteria in the high-probability mode when an explicit high-probability jackpot result is obtained may be different from the number of termination criteria in the high-probability mode when an unspecified high-probability jackpot result is obtained. The configuration in which the jackpot result is obtained may be a configuration in which the number of termination criteria is larger or the configuration may be smaller than in the case where the unspecified high-probability jackpot result is obtained.

In addition, a plurality of types of explicit high-accuracy jackpot results may be set so that the end reference times of the high-probability mode are different, and a plurality of types of unspecified high-accuracy jackpot results are set so that the end reference times of the high-probability mode are different. It may be set. Further, at least one of the explicit high-probability jackpot result and the unspecified high-probability jackpot result may be configured so that the number of termination criteria of the high-probability mode is smaller than that of at least one advantageous jackpot result, and the probability is higher than any of the advantageous jackpot results. It may be configured with a large number of mode end reference times.

In addition, as an unspecified high-probability jackpot result, if it occurs in a situation where the high-probability mode is the low-frequency support mode, another unspecified high-probability jackpot result that is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is obtained. It may be set. In this case, the other unspecified high-probability jackpot result may have a configuration in which the number of termination criteria of the high-probability mode is larger or smaller than the implicit high-accuracy jackpot result of each of the above embodiments.

(27) As a result of at least a part of the jackpots, a jackpot result in which the number of end reference times of the high probability mode and the end reference number of the high frequency support mode are different from each other as an opportunity to shift to the high probability support mode in the high probability mode is obtained. It may be a set configuration. In this case, there may be a jackpot result in which the end reference number of high-probability mode is larger than the end reference number of high-frequency support mode, and the end reference number of high-probability mode is the end of high-frequency support mode. There may be jackpot results that are less than the reference number of times. With this configuration, the transition mode of the game state can be further diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(28) The result of the lottery process performed on the pachinko machine 10 side, instead of being executed by the external device EX, for the effect lottery process for notifying the expectation degree of the end reference number of times of the high probability mode. By externally outputting the command corresponding to the above to the external device EX, the external display device 301 may be configured to execute the effect for notifying the expected degree. In this case, the lottery process of the effect content is individually executed by the effect for notifying the expectation degree on the pachinko machine 10 side and the effect for notifying the expectation degree on the external device EX side. By doing so, a plurality of types of information for predicting the end reference number of times in the high probability mode will be provided to the player, and the player will be able to make a high degree of prediction about the end reference number of times.

(29) Regarding the notification of the end reference number of times in the high probability mode, if the high probability mode is in the high frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to clearly indicate the end reference number of times. For example, the symbol display device 41 may clearly indicate the end reference number of times, and the end reference number of times may be subtracted and displayed each time the game round is digested. Further, in the configuration, the end reference number of times may be clearly indicated also in the external display device 301. On the contrary, in the external display device 301, the end reference number of times is not specified, and a plurality of types of numerical ranges are set and a notification mode corresponding to the numerical range is set, and a numerical range including the end reference number of times is set. The external display device 301 may be configured to perform notification in the notification mode corresponding to the above.

(30) A communication method conversion circuit is provided between the pachinko machine 10 and the external MPU 312, and a command output externally from the pachinko machine 10 is converted into a communication method that can be received by the external MPU 312 by the conversion circuit. It may be configured. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 outputs a command externally by serial communication, the conversion circuit may convert the command into a parallel system. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 outputs a command externally by parallel communication, the conversion circuit may convert the command into a serial system.

(31) When the open / close execution mode is generated, the information corresponding to the number of round games in the open / close execution mode may be externally output to the external device EX. In this case, a plurality of types of open / close execution modes in which the number of round games is different are set, and the open / close execution mode of which round game is indistinguishable or difficult to identify from the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is set as an external device. In EX, an effect for notifying the degree of expectation that the number of round games is large may be executed. Further, both the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX may be configured to perform an effect for notifying the degree of expectation.

(32) Instead of the configuration of shifting from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode when the number of times of digestion of the game times reaches the end reference number, the configuration may be such that the transition does not occur depending on the number of times of digestion of the game times. That is, in the case of the high probability mode, the high probability mode may be continued until at least the next big hit result occurs.

(33) A configuration may be configured in which a plurality of types of termination reference times of the high-frequency support mode when the low-probability mode is set to the high-frequency support mode are set. In this case, it is expected that it is impossible or difficult to identify which end reference number is from the operation of the pachinko machine 10, and the end reference number of the high frequency support mode is large in the external device EX. An effect for notifying the degree may be executed. Further, both the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX may be configured to perform an effect for notifying the degree of expectation.

(34) When executing the effect for game rounds, the variable command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light side MPU 82, but the type command may not be transmitted. Further, in addition to the variable command, an additional command indicating information such as whether or not to execute the pseudo-ream may be transmitted. In this case, the base display duration is defined in the variable command, and the additional display duration is defined with respect to the base display duration by the additional command. As a result, whether or not to execute an additional effect such as a pseudo-ream, and the type when executing the additional effect are determined by lottery on the main MPU 62, and the determination result is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. Even if it is set to this, the data about the effect transmitted from the main MPU 62 will be distributed to the variable command and the additional command, so that the data capacity of each command can be suppressed.

In the above configuration, when a command is externally output from the main MPU 62 in order to execute the interlocking effect or reproduction effect of the game times on the external device EX, the variable command and the additional command are output as the externally output command. Of these, only the additional command may be output externally, the command corresponding to the additional command may be output externally, or only the variable command may be output externally, and the variable command may be output. The command corresponding to the above may be output externally, both commands may be output externally, or the command corresponding to both commands may be output externally.

(35) The type of effect executed by the symbol display device 41 is accumulated on the pachinko machine 10 side, and the command corresponding to the accumulated result is externally output to the external device EX to correspond to the accumulated result. The effect may be executed by the external display device 301.

(36) When the pachinko machine 10 performs an abnormality notification or a status notification, a command corresponding to the abnormality notification may be externally output to the external device EX. In this case, the external display device 301 can also perform abnormality notification and status notification.

(37) In the first embodiment, the command may be externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX by parallel communication. Further, in the second embodiment, the command may be transmitted from the sound / light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 by parallel communication. In this case, the command may be externally output from the sound / light side MPU 82 to the external device EX by parallel communication, or the command may be externally output by serial communication.

(38) The opening / closing number of times and the opening mode setting pattern of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode of each pattern are not limited to those in each of the above embodiments, and the actions individually described in each of the above embodiments. It is optional as long as it can produce at least one of the effects.

Further, the upper limit number of each round game is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and is arbitrary as long as it can achieve at least one of the effects described individually in each of the above embodiments. Is. Further, the upper limit number may be different depending on the type of the round number specified mode, or the upper limit number may be different between the round games of the same round number specified mode.

Further, the opening mode according to the short-time mode is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, that is, the firing cycle of the game ball × n (n = 1, 2, Any of 3) The configuration may be set to the following time. Further, by making the opening duration longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, a prize may be substantially generated in the special electric winning device 32, but the opening duration is the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number during the round game. It may be a mode shorter than the product of and a mode, or it may be the same mode. Even in this case, in a situation where the special electric winning device 32 is opened in a short time mode, the possibility that the upper limit number of round games will be won for the special electric winning device 32 is reduced.

(39) In a round game in which only the special electric winning device 32 is opened in a short time mode, the upper limit is replaced with a configuration in which the upper limit of the number of game balls set for the round game is substantially not won. It may be configured so that a winning number of game balls can occur. For example, the opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 is set to be longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (for example, in the range of 0.6 sec to 64 sec), and the opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32 according to the opening duration and the opening mode. The product with the number of times is the same as or substantially the same as the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of round games, or 1 times or more and less than 2 times or 1 times or more and less than 3 times the product. The configuration is the value of. In this case, depending on the flow mode of the game balls in the game area, the winning of the upper limit number of game balls may not occur, or the winning may occur.

(40) As the short-time mode, a plurality of types of short-time modes may be set so that the exact opening duration is different, but the apparent operation mode of the special electric winning device 32 is the same. For example, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the unspecified big hit result and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result have the same apparent operation mode of the special electric winning device 32, but are selected for each opening / closing of the special electric winning device 32. The type of short-time mode may be different.

(41) During the period during which the open / close execution mode is being executed, the value of the high probability counter may be set to "0" regardless of the contents of the high probability counter before the shift to the open / close execution mode. In this case, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode during the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the timing for clearing the high probability counter "0" may be the timing at which the stop display according to the mode corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode is started on the special figure display unit 37a, and the open / close execution mode may be started. It may be the start timing, the timing in the middle of the opening time of the opening / closing execution mode, or the ending timing of the opening effect of the opening / closing execution mode. However, in the configuration, when the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed, the winning / failing lottery mode before the transition to the open / close execution mode cannot be determined from the contents of the high probability counter. Therefore, at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, it is preferable to execute data storage processing that makes it possible to specify the winning / failing lottery mode before the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

(42) During the period during which the open / close execution mode is being executed, the value of the high frequency counter may be set to "0" regardless of the contents of the high frequency counter before the shift to the open / close execution mode. Even in this case, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode during the open / close execution mode. Further, the timing for clearing the high frequency counter "0" may be the timing at which the stop display in the mode corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode is started on the special figure display unit 37a, and the open / close execution mode may be started. It may be the start timing, the timing in the middle of the opening time of the opening / closing execution mode, or the ending timing of the opening effect of the opening / closing execution mode. However, in this configuration, when the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed, the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode cannot be determined from the contents of the high frequency counter. Therefore, at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, it is preferable to execute data storage processing that makes it possible to specify the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode.

(43) The special electric winning device 32 is completely closed while the special electric winning device 32 is closed, but a part of the special electric winning device 32 may not be closed. In this case, a game ball may be configured to win a prize in the special electric winning device 32 even when the special electric winning device 32 is closed through a part of the area, and the part of the area is closed because the area is narrower than the game ball. The special electric winning device 32 may not be able to win a prize in the game ball.

(44) Instead of the configuration in which the game ball cannot be awarded to the second operating port 34 while the general electric accessory 34a is closed, the second operating port 34 is connected even when the general electric accessory 34a is closed. It may be configured so that a prize can be generated in the game ball. However, the ease of winning the prize needs to be lower than that during the opening of the general electric accessory 34a.

(45) As the winning / failing lottery mode, there is not only a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode, but also a medium-probability mode in which the probability of winning a big hit is lower than that of the high-probability mode and the probability of winning a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability mode. It may be configured to be present. The medium probability mode includes, for example, a jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode (for example, 1 / n n is an integer of 1 or more) and a winning probability in the low probability mode (for example, 1 / mm is 1 or more). It may be an intermediate probability with the integer m> n) (for example, 1 / (n + (mn) / 2)), it may be a probability higher than the intermediate probability, or it may be a lower probability than the intermediate probability. May be good.

(46) As the support mode, not only the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, but also the second operating port 34 has a lower winning frequency than the high-frequency support mode, and the second operating port 34 has a lower frequency than the low-frequency support mode. There may be a configuration in which a medium-frequency support mode with a high winning frequency exists.

(47) The operating means capable of notifying that the mode is in the high probability mode is not limited to the symbol display device 41 in which the variable display of the symbol is performed in each game round, and is dedicated to the notification. It may be a display device, a movable decorative member, or a light emitting unit such as an LED.

(48) As the opening mode of the special electric winning device 32, a medium-time mode in which the opening duration is shorter than the long-time mode and longer than the short-time mode may exist.

(49) The holding information acquired due to the occurrence of a prize in the first operating port 33 and the holding information acquired due to the occurrence of a winning in the second operating port 34 are separately stored and stored, and the first 2 A configuration in which the reserved information on the operating port 34 side is preferentially digested may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the reserved information on the first operating port 33 side is preferentially digested may be applied. Often, a configuration may be applied that is digested in the order of acquisition regardless of whether it is the first actuating port 33 or the second actuating port 34.

Further, in the above configuration, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be arranged side by side instead of arranging a plurality of operating ports side by side in the upper and lower directions. The mouths may be arranged diagonally side by side. Furthermore, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged apart from each other so that only the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34 can be aimed at depending on the operation mode of the launch operating device 28. It may be configured.

Further, in the above configuration, the special figure display unit 37a has a first display area for displaying the result of a hit / fail determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and a winning of the second operating port 34. A second display area may be provided to display the result of the validity / rejection determination of the reserved information acquired based on the above. In this case, the pattern changes in the first display area prior to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or based on the hit / fail judgment. At the same time as the display is started, the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game round is terminated. In addition, the pattern variation display in the second display area is based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is subject to the hit / fail judgment or is subject to the hit / miss judgment. Is started and the stop result corresponding to the hit / fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display of one game round is terminated.

(50) The hold information acquired due to the winning of the first operating port 33 is subject to the winning / failing determination, and the holding information acquired due to the winning of the second operating port 34. May be configured such that the profit obtained by the player differs depending on whether or not the player is the target of the hit / fail judgment. For example, when the hold information on the first operating port 33 side is the target of the hit / fail determination, the game results are distributed as in the above embodiment, but the hold information on the second operating port 34 side is the hit / fail judgment. If the target is a big hit and the big hit is won, the result may be divided into an advantageous big hit result, an explicit high-accuracy jackpot result, and a low-accuracy jackpot result.

Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operating ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(51) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the voice emission control device 80 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 90 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 80. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 80 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(52) The device for executing the effect for the game round is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the game round is executed by the operation of the decorative member provided movably. However, the effect for game rounds may be executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or the effect for game rounds may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above embodiments. good.

(53) In the above embodiment, the stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, but instead of this, the special figure display unit 37a may not be provided. Even if it is a game result, a common stop result may be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, resulting in the special figure display unit 37a. It may be configured so that it is not possible to identify which game result is from the display of. Further, in each of the above embodiments, in the special figure display unit 37a, the display of a predetermined pattern is repeated regardless of the result of the hit / miss determination and the distribution determination, so that the reach display and the reach effect are not executed and the final stop is performed. Although the result of the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment is notified based on the result, the special figure display unit 37a may also be configured to perform the reach display and the reach effect, and the reach effect is performed in the game times when the reach effect occurs. The stop result different from the game times that do not occur may be displayed on the special figure display unit 37a.

(54) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Production processing execution means for executing production processing for executing production corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing (function for executing special figure variation start processing in main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82 and display side) MPU92) and
External output means for outputting information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing to the outside of the gaming machine (in the first embodiment, external output processing at the start of fluctuation and external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62). In the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 and A function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, since the information corresponding to the result of the effect processing is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The external output means is a predetermined output means (external command at the start of fluctuation) that outputs predetermined information (external command at the start of fluctuation) that is information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing and does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, sound light. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the side MPU 82, and a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A2, in the configuration in which the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process can be executed outside the gaming machine, the predetermined information does not include the information indicating the result of the privilege lottery process. It is possible to suppress the act of misusing the result of illegally reading. Further, it is possible to prevent the result corresponding to the privilege lottery process from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

Feature A3. There are multiple types of benefits granted by the privilege granting means.
The predetermined output means is characterized in that it outputs the predetermined information so as not to include not only the information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process but also the information specifying the type of the privilege. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A3, since the predetermined information does not include the information indicating the type of the privilege, it is possible to suppress the act of misusing the result of illegally reading the predetermined information. In addition, it is possible to prevent the information specifying the type of privilege from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

Feature A4. It is provided with an effect executing means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing the effect.
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the effect process. It is equipped with a function to execute light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function to execute V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92).
The external output means does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process at a timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, but the predetermined effect. Predetermined output means for outputting predetermined information (external command at the start of fluctuation) including information corresponding to the contents of the above (in the first embodiment, a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62, second In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62. The gaming machine according to feature A1, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

According to the feature A4, since the predetermined information is output at the timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the predetermined effect is supported during the execution of the predetermined effect. It is possible to execute the effect to be performed by an external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. Further, since the predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process, it is possible to suppress an act of misusing the result of illegally reading the predetermined information. Further, it is possible to prevent the result corresponding to the privilege lottery process from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

Feature A5. The predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect as the predetermined information, and is executed as the predetermined effect in both cases where the privilege granting is won or not in the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature A4, which outputs information corresponding to the content of the effect to be obtained.

According to the feature A5, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine by using the predetermined information, but it is impossible to grasp the result of the privilege lottery process from the predetermined information. Become.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect for a predetermined continuation period.
The predetermined output means is characterized in that it outputs the predetermined information without including not only the information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process but also the information specifying the predetermined duration. Or the gaming machine according to A5.

According to the feature A6, it is possible to reduce the types of predetermined information as compared with the configuration in which the information indicating the predetermined duration is included in the predetermined information, and to simplify the configuration for outputting the predetermined information. Is possible.

Feature A7. The predetermined output means does not output information that can specify the entire contents of the predetermined effect, but outputs information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect as the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A7, since the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect, the effect corresponding to the part of the effect range is performed outside the gaming machine. It can be executed by the external production means of. In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting predetermined information.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the predetermined output means outputs common predetermined information for a plurality of types of predetermined effects.

According to the feature A8, it is possible to suppress the types of predetermined information, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting the predetermined information.

Feature A9. The predetermined effect control means can select a plurality of types of effect contents for the predetermined effect determination element derived from the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect content of the predetermined effect, while deriving from the predetermined effect determination element. The production content is selected so that the predetermined production to be performed includes the common production content.
The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, wherein the predetermined information output by the predetermined output means includes information that clearly indicates the common effect content.

According to the feature A9, since the predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the common effect content, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect even in a situation where the entire content of the predetermined effect has not been determined. Therefore, it is possible to output predetermined information to the outside. As a result, the degree of freedom in the output timing of the predetermined information is improved, and it becomes possible to facilitate the design of the configuration for outputting the predetermined information.

Feature A10. A specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means is provided.
The effect processing execution means determines the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the transmission of control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process by the specific control means (main side MPU62) as the effect process. (In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound / light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound / light side MPU 82 is executed. A function, in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A8 or A9, wherein the predetermined effect determining element corresponds to the content of the control information.

According to the feature A10, it is possible to execute the effect by the effect executing means so as to correspond to the content of the control information received from the specific control means, and the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. It is possible to execute the production in.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the specific control means has the predetermined output means.

According to the feature A11, since the specific control means existing on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to consolidate the functions of managing the operation of the gaming machine into the specific control means. Will be.

Feature A12. The effect content determining means is an effect lottery means for executing an effect content lottery process for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the first and fourth embodiments, the sound light side). The function of executing the processing of step S1204 and step S1206 in the MPU 82, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the processing of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The effect lottery means executes the effect content lottery process in an manner corresponding to the type of control information, and the effect content common to the predetermined effect that can be selected for one control information is common to the predetermined effect. The effect content lottery process is executed so as to be included.
The predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the common effect content.
The specific control means is a correspondence information storage means for storing specific correspondence information capable of specifying a correspondence relationship between the type of control information and the type of predetermined information (main side ROM 63 in the first and third embodiments, the first 2. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that the sound / light side ROM83) is provided in the second embodiment.

According to the feature A12, a plurality of types of effect contents can be selected for one control information transmitted from the specific control means, so that the effect contents of the predetermined effect can be varied while suppressing an increase in the types of control information. It becomes possible to change. In this case, in the effect content lottery process executed by the predetermined effect control means, the predetermined effect that can be selected for one control information includes a common effect content. As a result, in the configuration in which the effect content of the predetermined effect is diversified while suppressing the increase in the types of control information as described above, the specific control means externally outputs the predetermined information corresponding to the common effect content. It is possible to perform an effect corresponding to a predetermined effect by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. Further, since the specific control means stores specific correspondence information that can specify the correspondence relationship between the type of control information and the type of predetermined information, the predetermined information can be easily specified from the control information transmitted by the specific control means. Is possible. Therefore, the process for outputting predetermined information can be simplified.

Feature A13. It is provided with an effect executing means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing the effect.
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the effect process. It is equipped with a function to execute light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function to execute V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92).
The external output means is a specific output means (main side in the first embodiment) that outputs specific information (variable command) corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect after the predetermined effect is started in the effect executing means. The function of executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus in the MPU 62, the function of executing the process of step S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A12, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature A13, even if the player misses the predetermined effect in the effect execution means, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to confirm the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect again. Further, when the effect is executed by shifting the time so that the game machine side is the front side and the game machine outside side is the rear side, it is possible to relate the contents of the effect.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information after the predetermined effect is completed in the effect executing means.

According to the feature A14, it is possible to prevent the effect outside the gaming machine based on the external output of the specific information and the predetermined effect in the effect execution means from overlapping in time. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to each production.

Feature A15. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the specific information includes information that enables the entire content of at least a part of the effect range of the predetermined effect to be specified.

According to the feature A15, the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine can reproduce at least a part of the effect content of the predetermined effect as a whole. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who missed the part of the effect range with an opportunity to confirm the part of the effect range again.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the specific information includes information that enables the entire effect content of the predetermined effect to be specified.

According to the feature A16, it is possible to reproduce the entire effect content of the predetermined effect by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who missed the predetermined effect again with an opportunity to confirm the predetermined effect.

Feature A17. A specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means is provided.
The effect processing execution means determines the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the transmission of control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process by the specific control means (main side MPU62) as the effect process. (In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound / light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound / light side MPU 82 is executed. A function, in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82) is provided.
The specific output means is used as the specific information to determine the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that triggered the determination of the effect content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A13 to A16, which outputs information including the information to be played.

According to the feature A17, in the configuration in which the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed by the external effect means outside the gaming machine, the control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the specific information to be output to the outside of the game machine. It becomes possible.

Feature A18. As the control information, the specific control means is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, and is information that enables the effect content of the predetermined effect to be determined by the effect content determination means (first control information). The variable command) is transmitted to the effect content determining means, and separately, the second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determining means. ,
The specific output means outputs, as the specific information, information including the first control information or information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while the second control. The gaming machine according to feature A17, characterized in that it does not output information including information.

According to the feature A18, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it is possible to carefully confirm the result of the privilege lottery process in the effect content determining means. .. In this case, the first control information or the information corresponding to the first control information is externally output as specific information to the outside of the gaming machine, while the second control information is not externally output. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside while enabling the execution of the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature A19. The gaming machine according to feature A17 or A18, wherein the specific control means has the specific output means.

According to the feature A19, since the specific control means existing on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting specific information to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to consolidate the functions of managing the operation of the gaming machine into the specific control means. It becomes.

Feature A20. The effect processing execution means, as the effect process, performs the process of the effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82) for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect. It has a function to execute, a function to execute the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment).
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein the effect content determining means has the specific output means.

According to the feature A20, since the specific information is externally output from the effect content determining means, the specific information is externally output so that the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means can be specified. Is possible. As a result, the entire predetermined effect can be reproduced by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine.

Feature A21. The privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player as the privilege granting when the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process.
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the effect executing means or other means is controlled so that the special effect corresponding to the special gaming state is executed after the predetermined effect is executed. Special effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1211 to S1220 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2210 to S2218 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment. , In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2605 to S2613 in the sound / light side MPU 82) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information when the special effect is started.

According to the feature A21, when the special gaming state is executed in the gaming machine, the external effect means outside the gaming machine can execute the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect immediately before that. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game during the special game state. Further, when the external effect means outside the gaming machine reproduces at least a part of the effect range of the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect to be reproduced is performed before the transition to the special gaming state. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a predetermined effect.

Feature A22. As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode of high frequency winning mode) in which the duration is relatively long and the second special gaming state (low frequency winning mode) in which the duration is relatively short Open / close execution mode) is set,
The feature A21 is characterized in that the specific output means outputs the specific information when the first special gaming state is reached, and does not output the specific information when the second special gaming state is reached. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A22, specific information is output externally when a state having a relatively long duration among the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state is started, so that an effect for reproducing a predetermined effect is achieved. The effect will be executed when the period for performing the above is secured.

Feature A23. The gaming machine according to feature A21 or A22, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information in the case of the special gaming state in which the duration is longer than the duration of the predetermined effect. ..

According to the feature A23, in the external effect means, the effect is executed when the period for performing the effect for reproducing the predetermined effect is secured.

Feature A24. The external output means is related effect information (external at the start of fluctuation) for enabling the external effect means (external device EX) existing outside the game machine to execute an external effect corresponding to the processing result of the effect process. A function for executing a related output means (in the first embodiment, an external output process at the start of fluctuation and an external output setting process at the start of bonus) in the main MPU 62 for outputting a command (command for fluctuation), the second embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62, and the processing of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 are performed in the third embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A23, which comprises a function to execute, and a function to execute the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A24, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature A25. It is provided with an effect executing means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing the effect.
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the effect process. It is equipped with a function to execute light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function to execute V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92).
The relational output means is characterized in that it outputs the relational effect information in order to enable the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect to be executed in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A25, since the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect is executed in the situation where the predetermined effect is executed by the external effect means, it is possible to perform the mutually related effects at the same time, and the effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to both the means and the external production means.

Feature A26. A specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means is provided.
The effect processing execution means determines the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the transmission of control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process by the specific control means (main side MPU62) as the effect process. (In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound / light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound / light side MPU 82 is executed. A function, in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82) is provided.
The relational output means is characterized in that it outputs information including the control information or information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information as the relationship effect information. The gaming machine described in A25.

According to the feature A26, in a configuration in which the execution control of the predetermined effect is performed by the predetermined effect control means based on the control of the specific control means, it is possible to execute the external effect by using the control information transmitted by the specific control means. Will be.

Feature A27. The gaming machine according to feature A26, wherein the specific control means has the related output means.

According to the feature A27, since the specific control means existing on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to consolidate the functions of managing the operation of the gaming machine into the specific control means. Will be. Further, it is possible to externally output the relational effect information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information in the specific control means.

Feature A28. A specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means is provided.
The effect processing execution means corresponds to the type of control information based on the fact that the specific control means (main side MPU62) transmits control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect process. In this embodiment, the effect content determination means for executing the effect content lottery process for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, step S1204 in the sound / light side MPU 82 and A function of executing the process of step S1206, a function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment). Prepare,
The relational output means outputs information corresponding to the result of the effect content lottery process as the relationship effect information.
The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein the effect content determining means has the related output means.

According to the feature A28, since it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process executed by the effect content determination means as the relationship effect information, the relationship effect corresponds to the entire predetermined effect. It becomes possible to execute the production. Further, since the related effect information is output externally from the effect content determining means, the configuration for outputting the related effect information based on the result of the effect content lottery process can be simplified.

Feature A29. The external effect means is a pattern display means for variablely displaying a pattern.
The effect A25 to A28 are characterized in that the effect executing means is at least one of a sound output means (speaker unit 54) for executing a sound output effect and a light emitting means (display light emitting unit 53) for executing a light emitting effect. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature A29, the sound output effect or the light emission effect related to the pattern display means provided outside the gaming machine can be performed on the gaming machine, and the effects on the gaming machine and each effect means outside the gaming machine can be mutually performed. It becomes possible to relate to.

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A29, wherein the external effect means is an embodiment corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process after executing the unit effect.

According to the feature A30, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means and to notify the result. As a result, even if the gaming machine does not have the effect means having these functions, the function is fulfilled by the external effect means.

Feature A31. There is no display means for performing a reach effect to teach the player the degree of expectation that the privilege has been won.
The gaming machine according to feature A30, wherein the reach effect can be performed in the unit effect of the external effect means.

According to the feature A31, since the gaming machine is not equipped with the effect means having the function of executing the reach effect, the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified. Further, since the function of executing the reach effect is performed by the external effect means, it is possible to provide the reach effect to the player.

Feature A32. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A31, wherein the front portion of the gaming machine is capable of arranging the external effect means in front of the front portion of the gaming machine.

According to the feature A32, when the external effect means is used as the effect means of the gaming machine, the external effect means can be arranged at a position easily recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the external effect means can be paid. It will be possible to increase.

Feature A33. A window portion (window portion 51) is formed on the front portion of the gaming machine so that the gaming area formed inside the gaming machine can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to feature A32, wherein the front portion of the gaming machine is capable of arranging the external effect means at a position facing the window portion in front of the window portion.

According to the feature A33, the external effect means can be arranged at a position easily visible to the player, and the degree of attention to the external effect means can be increased.

Feature A34. It is provided with an effect executing means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing the effect.
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the effect process. It is equipped with a function to execute light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function to execute V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92).
The gaming machine is
When the gaming machine is in a state of the corresponding side, which is one of a predetermined state (a state of high probability mode and a low frequency support mode) and a state of not a predetermined state, the effect in the effect executing means and the external effect. Corresponding control means for controlling so as to correspond to the external effect in the means (a function of executing the process of step S1707 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, step S2507 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). Function to execute the processing of) and
When the gaming machine is in the non-corresponding side, which is the other of the predetermined state and the non-predetermined state, the effect in the effect executing means and the external effect in the external effect means do not correspond to each other. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1708 in the main MPU 62, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2508 in the main MPU 62).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A24 to A33.

According to the feature A34, depending on whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, there are cases where the effect in the effect executing means and the effect in the external effect means correspond to each other and cases where the effect does not correspond to each other. This makes it possible to grasp or predict whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined state by confirming the correspondence between the two effects, and to draw the player's attention to both the effect executing means and the external effect means. Is possible. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature A35. As the gaming state, there are a first state (high probability mode) in which the privilege is relatively easy to be given to the player and a second state (low probability mode) in which the privilege is hard to be given.
The predetermined state is a state in which the player is in the first state, and the player cannot or is difficult to identify which of the first state and the second state is the notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature A34, which is characterized in that it is in a state of being in a state of being.

According to the feature A35, even in a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine is in the first state, by confirming the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means. , It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is the first state. In this case, the player pays attention to both the effect executing means and the external effect means in order to grasp whether or not the player is in the first state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature A36. The privilege lottery means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the privilege grant is relatively high or low as the lottery mode.
The predetermined state is a state in which the high-probability mode is set, and the player cannot or is difficult to identify which of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode is the notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature A34, which is characterized in that it is in a state of.

According to the feature A36, even in a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine is in the high probability mode, by confirming the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means. , It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is a high probability mode. In this case, the player pays attention to both the effect executing means and the external effect means in order to grasp whether or not the mode is in the high probability mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature A37. The relational output means has the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means.
The correspondence control means outputs, as the relational effect information, information for making the external effect in the external effect means correspond to the effect in the effect execution means.
The non-correspondence control means has one of the features A34 to A36, which is characterized in that the non-correspondence control means outputs information for not associating the external effect in the external effect means with the effect in the effect execution means as the relational effect information. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A37, by adjusting the effect content in the external effect means, it is possible to create a situation in which both the effect execution means and the external effect means correspond to each other and a situation in which they do not correspond. .. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the effect execution means and the external effect means while not affecting the effect execution mode in the effect execution means.

Feature A38. A specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means is provided.
The effect processing execution means determines the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the transmission of control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process by the specific control means (main side MPU62) as the effect process. (In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound / light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound / light side MPU 82 is executed. A function, in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature A37, wherein the effect content determining means grasps the execution continuation period of the predetermined effect based on the control information.

According to the feature A38, since the predetermined effect is executed over the execution continuation period corresponding to the control information transmitted from the specific control means, it is difficult to change the effect content. On the other hand, when the correspondence between the effect execution means and the external effect means is changed, the effect content of the external effect means is changed. Therefore, when the correspondence between the two effects is changed, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased, and the correspondence between the two effects can be appropriately changed.

Feature A39. When a specific event (small hit result) that can occur in the process of progressing the game occurs, the state in which one of the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means is controlled is changed to the state in which the other is controlled. The gaming machine according to any one of features A34 to A38, which is characterized by being changed.

According to the feature A39, since the change in the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means is triggered by the occurrence of a specific event, the trigger is easy for the player to understand.

Feature A40. The state of the corresponding side is a state that is not the predetermined state, and the state of the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state.
The non-corresponding control means is the effect in the effect executing means and the effect in the effect execution means when a specific event (small hit result) that can occur in the process of progressing the game occurs when the gaming machine is in the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A34 to A39, which is characterized in that it does not correspond to the external effect in the external effect means.

According to the feature A40, when a specific event occurs in a situation where the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, both the effect executing means and the external effect means do not correspond to each other. As a result, the player who confirms that both effects do not correspond to each other can grasp that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, and can increase the degree of attention to both effects.

Feature A41. The gaming machine according to feature A40, wherein the external effect is an effect that enables the effect executing means to notify in advance the type of effect that occurs thereafter.

According to the feature A41, in the external effect, the effect of the effect execution means is notified in advance, so that the player can predict or grasp the content of the effect that occurs after the external effect by checking the external effect. .. In this case, if a specific event occurs in a situation where the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, an event occurs in which the content of the advance notification performed as an external effect does not match the content of the subsequent effect of the effect execution means. do. The player who confirms this event not only recognizes that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, but also feels a surprise at the disagreement between the two effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A42. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and
Equipped with
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to a state in which the opening / closing control is executed as the privilege granting.
The privilege lottery means is a specific determination result (small hit result) that does not change the mode that affects the profit of the player before and after the end of the state, although the transition to the state in which the opening / closing control is executed occurs. Equipped with a specific judgment means that can be judged
The gaming machine according to any one of features A39 to A41, wherein the specific event results in the specific determination result.

According to the feature A42, it is possible to increase the advantage for the player when a specific determination result is obtained. In addition, it is possible to use the specific determination result as an opportunity to change the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means, and the configuration is simplified and designed as compared with the configuration in which a new opportunity is set. It is possible to facilitate the process.

Feature A43. The corresponding control means is such that the same or corresponding character as the character displayed in the effect executing means is displayed in the external effect means.
The non-corresponding control means is any one of the features A34 to A42, characterized in that a character different from or not corresponding to the character displayed in the effect executing means is displayed in the external effect means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A43, the correspondence relationship between the effect executing means and the external effect means is changed by changing the type of the displayed character. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the correspondence has been changed by the relatively simple configuration.

Feature A44. An effect executing means (display / light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing an effect, and
The specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means and
Equipped with
The effect processing execution means is
As the effect processing, the effect content determining means (in the second embodiment, the sound / light side MPU 82) determines the effect content based on the transmission of the control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process by the specific control means. A function of executing the process of step S2207, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment), and
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in the sound / light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) is executed in a manner corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. A function to execute processing and sound output control processing, and a function to execute V interrupt processing on the display side MPU 92),
Equipped with
The external output means has a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the predetermined output means for outputting the predetermined information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect executing means (in the second embodiment, the sound light side MPU 82. , The third embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound / light side MPU 82).
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A43, wherein the effect content determining means has the predetermined output means.

According to the feature A44, since the predetermined information is externally output from the effect content determining means, the predetermined information is externally output so that the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means can be specified. Is possible. This makes it possible to perform an effect related to the entire effect content of the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature A45. The predetermined output means is used as the predetermined information to determine the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that triggered the determination of the effect content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to feature A44, which outputs information including information to be played.

According to the feature A45, in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to a predetermined effect can be executed by an external effect means outside the gaming machine, control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as predetermined information to be output to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible.

Feature A46. As the control information, the specific control means is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, and is information that enables the effect content of the predetermined effect to be determined by the effect content determination means (first control information). The variable command) is transmitted to the effect content determining means, and separately, the second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determining means. ,
The predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, information including the first control information or information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while the second control. The gaming machine according to feature A45, which is characterized in that it does not output information.

According to the feature A46, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it is possible to carefully confirm the result of the privilege lottery process in the effect content determining means. .. In this case, the first control information or the information corresponding thereto is externally output as predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, while the second control information is not externally output. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside while enabling the execution of the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature A47. The effect content determining means is an effect lottery means for executing an effect content lottery process for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (step in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment). It has a function of executing the process of S2207, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82).
The effect lottery means executes the effect content lottery process in an manner corresponding to the type of control information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A44 to A46, wherein the predetermined output means outputs information corresponding to the result of the effect content lottery process as the predetermined information.

According to the feature A47, since it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process, it is possible to grasp the entire effect content of the predetermined effect on the device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A48. When the effect content determining means receives the control information and executes the predetermined effect, the effect information transmission unit transmits the corresponding information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92). (In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 in the sound light side MPU 82).
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect of the mode corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A44 to A47, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the corresponding information as the predetermined information.

According to the feature A48, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control means based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means is external as predetermined information. It is output. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare predetermined information as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity. Further, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for externally outputting the predetermined information, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A49. The communication method (serial communication) when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output means is the same as the communication method (serial communication) when the corresponding information is transmitted by the corresponding information transmitting means. The gaming machine according to the feature A49.

According to the feature A49, it is possible to externally output the predetermined information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information to the correspondence effect control means. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A50. One of the features A44 to A49, wherein the predetermined output means outputs midway information (exit command) corresponding to the effect content during the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A50, it is possible to execute the corresponding effect by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine during the execution of the predetermined effect. Further, since the configuration of the above feature A44 is provided and the effect content determining means outputs externally, it becomes easy to specify the timing of external output during the execution of the predetermined effect, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. Is planned.

Feature A51. The specific control means includes a specific side output means (a function of executing steps S602, step S803, step S809, step S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62) that outputs information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A44 to A50.

According to the feature A51, in the configuration in which the information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the specific control means, the external output of the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is performed by the effect content determining means. By setting this, it is possible to distribute the main body of the external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform external output.

Feature A52. The gaming machine according to feature A51, wherein the communication method when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output means is different from the communication method when the information is output by the output means on the specific side. ..

According to the feature A52, since the communication method differs depending on the type of information to be output externally, it is possible to perform external output in accordance with the nature of the information, and it is possible to preferably perform external output. ..

Feature A53. The output means on the specific side outputs information through an external output means (external terminal board 79).
The gaming machine according to feature A51 or A52, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information through the external output terminal board.

According to the feature A53, it is possible to consolidate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine into the external output means. This facilitates wiring work for external output.

Feature A54. The output means on the specific side uses one terminal in the external output means when outputting one piece of information to the outside.
The gaming machine according to feature A53, wherein the predetermined output means utilizes a plurality of terminals in the external output means for external output of the predetermined information.

According to the feature A54, since the number of terminals for the specific control means to externally output the state of the gaming machine is one, even if there are a plurality of types of states of the gaming machine to be externally output. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. On the other hand, since the effect content determining means has a plurality of terminals for externally outputting the information corresponding to the effect content, the information can be output as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of information output externally.

Feature A55. It is provided with an effect executing means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing the effect.
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the effect process. It is equipped with a function to execute light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function to execute V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92).
The external output means is
When the first timing is reached in relation to the predetermined effect, the first predetermined output means for outputting the first predetermined information including the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 External output processing at the start of fluctuation, in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2206 in the sound / light side MPU 82, in the third embodiment, a function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62) When,
A second predetermined output means for outputting a second predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect when the second timing is reached in relation to the predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 A function to execute the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, a function to execute the process of step S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A54, characterized in that

According to the feature A55, the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect is externally output as the first predetermined information and the second predetermined information at different timings. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect corresponding to each timing by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect executed by the external effect means. ..

Feature A56. The first predetermined output means has information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the first timing, which is a timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. It outputs the first predetermined information including
The second predetermined output means includes information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the second timing, which is after the timing when the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. 2. The gaming machine according to feature A55, which outputs predetermined information.

According to the feature A56, there is an opportunity to be externally output at each of the timing before and the timing after the effect content of the effect execution means becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. As a result, it becomes possible to perform the production by the external production means in different modes depending on whether or not the production content corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, and to diversify the production by the external production means. It becomes possible.

Feature A57. The gaming machine according to feature A56, wherein the second predetermined information has a larger amount of information of the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information.

In a situation where the effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means does not correspond to the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, in order not to impair the function of executing the predetermined effect. It is not preferable that more information than necessary about the production content of the predetermined production is provided by the external production means. On the other hand, if the production content of the predetermined production is after the production content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, even if a lot of information about the production content of the predetermined production is provided by the external production means, the predetermined production can be performed. It is preferable because it does not impair the function of being executed, and on the contrary, it is possible to perform various effects by external effect means. Then, in such a situation, the second predetermined information has a larger amount of information of the production content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information, so that the external information is appropriate at each timing. It is possible to output.

Feature A58. The first predetermined output means does not use information that can specify the entire contents of the predetermined effect, but uses information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect as the first predetermined information. It is to output
The second predetermined output means outputs information that makes it possible to specify the entire contents of the predetermined effect, or information corresponding to a larger range of effects than in the case of the first predetermined information, as the second predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A55 to A57, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature A58, since the first predetermined information is output externally, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. It becomes. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly shown by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, it is possible to reproduce the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means by the external effect means, and the predetermined effect is given to the player who missed the predetermined effect. It will be possible to give an opportunity to confirm again.

Feature A59. The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information common to a plurality of types of the predetermined effects.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A58, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs individual second predetermined information for a plurality of types of predetermined effects.

According to the feature A59, when the first predetermined information is externally output, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to a common effect content for a plurality of types of predetermined effects by an external effect means, and a second predetermined effect. When the information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform the effect corresponding to each predetermined effect by the external effect means.

Feature A60. The effect processing execution means can select a plurality of types of effect contents for a predetermined effect determination element as the effect content of the predetermined effect, but is common to the predetermined effect derived from the predetermined effect determination element. The effect content determining means for selecting the effect content so as to include the effect content (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the second embodiment). It is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment).
The first predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the common effect content, but does not include information that clearly indicates the non-common effect content.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A59, wherein the second predetermined information includes at least information that clearly indicates the non-common effect content.

According to the feature A60, since the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the common effect content in the predetermined effect by the external effect means outside the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly shown by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, it is possible to reproduce the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means by the external effect means, and the predetermined effect is given to the player who missed the predetermined effect. It will be possible to give an opportunity to confirm again.

Feature A61. The first predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect as the first predetermined information, and is the predetermined in both cases where the privilege granting is won or not in the privilege lottery process. It outputs information corresponding to the content of the production that can be executed as the production.
The second predetermined output means, as the second predetermined information, is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect, and corresponds to the effect content that differs depending on whether or not the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A55 to A60, which is characterized in that it outputs the information to be played.

According to the feature A61, since the first predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and not clearly indicating the result of the privilege lottery process by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. .. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly shown by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and clearly indicating the result of the privilege lottery process by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible to reproduce the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means by the external effect means, and it is possible to give the player who missed the predetermined effect an opportunity to confirm the predetermined effect again. Become.

Feature A62. The first predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process, and the second predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of A55 to A61.

According to the feature A62, there are a case where the result of the privilege lottery process is not specified in an external effect means outside the gaming machine and a case where the result of the privilege lottery process is specified. It is possible to make it happen. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production performed by the external production means.

Feature A63. There are multiple types of benefits granted by the privilege granting means.
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information without including information indicating the type of the privilege.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A62, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information so as to include information indicating the type of the privilege.

According to the feature A63, there are cases where the external production means outside the gaming machine does not specify the type of privilege, and cases where the type of privilege is specified. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production performed by the external production means.

Feature A64. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect for a predetermined continuation period.
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information without including information indicating the predetermined duration.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A63, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information so as to include information indicating the predetermined duration.

According to the feature A64, there are cases where the external effect means outside the gaming machine performs the effect in a manner not based on the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect, and cases where the effect is performed in a mode based on the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect. It is possible to give rise to each. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production performed by the external production means.

Feature A65. A specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means is provided.
The effect processing execution means determines the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the transmission of control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process by the specific control means (main side MPU62) as the effect process. (In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound / light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of step S2207 in the sound / light side MPU 82 is executed. A function, in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A64, wherein the effect content determining means has the second predetermined output means.

According to the feature A65, since it is easier for the effect content determining means to grasp the details of the effect content of the predetermined effect than the specific control means, the effect content determining means has the second predetermined output means, so that the first predetermined information and the first predetermined information can be obtained. 2 It becomes easy to make the amount of information about the production content of the predetermined production different from that of the predetermined information.

Feature A66. When the effect content determining means receives the control information and executes the predetermined effect, the effect information transmission unit transmits the corresponding information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92). (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the sound light side. A function to execute the process of step S2604 in the MPU 82) is provided.
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means so that the corresponding effect in the mode corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The gaming machine according to feature A65, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the corresponding information as the second predetermined information.

According to the feature A66, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control means based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means is the second predetermined information. Is output externally as. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the second predetermined information as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity. Further, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for externally outputting the second predetermined information, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A67. The feature A66 is characterized in that the communication method when the second predetermined information is output by the second predetermined output means is the same as the communication method when the corresponding information is transmitted by the corresponding information transmitting means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A67, it is possible to externally output the second predetermined information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information to the correspondence effect control means, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A68. The gaming machine according to any one of features A65 to A67, wherein the specific control means has the first predetermined output means.

According to the feature A68, since the specific control means externally outputs the first predetermined information and the effect content determining means externally outputs the second predetermined information, the subject of the external output is distributed according to the function of each control means. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform external output.

Feature A69. The gaming machine according to feature A68, wherein the first predetermined output means and the second predetermined output means output information through the same external output means (external terminal board 79).

According to the feature A69, it is possible to consolidate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine into the external output means. This facilitates wiring work for external output.

Feature A70. The first predetermined output means utilizes one terminal in the external output means at the time of external output of the first predetermined information.
The gaming machine according to feature A69, wherein the second predetermined output means utilizes a plurality of terminals in the external output means for external output of the predetermined information.

According to the feature A70, since the number of terminals for the specific control means to output the first predetermined information to the outside is one terminal, the number of terminals is suppressed while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. It becomes possible. On the other hand, since the effect content determining means has a plurality of terminals for externally outputting the second predetermined information, the information can be output as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of predetermined information output to the outside.

Feature A71. External output means (external terminal board 79) for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, and
A state information output means (step S602, step S803, step S809, step S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62) that outputs information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine by using one terminal provided in the external output means. Function to execute) and
Equipped with
The external output means is a predetermined output means (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 62) that outputs information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing by using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means. The function of executing the external output processing at the start of the fluctuation and the external output setting processing at the start of the bonus in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the third embodiment. The feature A1 to A70 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment). The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A71, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the gaming machine is one, even if there are multiple types of states of the gaming machine to be externally output, the external output is performed. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the above. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the information corresponding to the content of the effect is a plurality, it is possible to output the information as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of information output externally.

Feature A72. It is provided with an effect executing means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing the effect.
The effect processing execution means is
As the effect processing, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (step in the sound light side MPU 82 in the first and fourth embodiments). A function of executing the process of S1203 to step S1206, a function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. )When,
As the effect processing, a predetermined effect control means (light emission control process and sound output in the sound light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect of the effect content determined by the effect content determining means is executed. A function to execute control processing and a function to execute V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
Equipped with
The effect content determining means receives control information from another control means (main side MPU 62) and transmits control information to another control means (display side MPU 92) when determining the effect content of the predetermined effect. To do at least one of
The gaming machine according to feature A71, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the control information or information corresponding to the control information by using the plurality of terminals.

According to the feature A72, even if there are many types of the control information in the configuration in which the control information used when executing the predetermined effect or the information corresponding to the control information is output externally, the information for the effect is used. Is output externally as a command, so it is possible to flexibly respond to the large number of types of control information.

Feature A73. The gaming machine according to feature A72, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the control information by using the plurality of terminals.

According to the feature A73, since the control information is also used as the information for external output, it is not necessary to prepare the information for external output as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature A74. The communication method when the information is output by the predetermined output means is the same as the communication method when the control information is transmitted between the effect content determining means and the other control means. The gaming machine according to the feature A72 or A73.

According to the feature A74, the information can be output to the outside by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A75. The effect processing execution means is
As the effect processing, the effect content determining means for determining the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82). In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82).
Corresponding information transmitting means (in the first embodiment, sound light) that transmits the corresponding information (stop result command and pattern command) corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determining means to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU92). A function to execute the process of step S1208 in the side MPU 82, a function to execute the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2604 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function) and
Equipped with
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect of the mode corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The effect content determining means has the predetermined output means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A71 to A74, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the corresponding information or the corresponding information.

According to the feature A75, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control means based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means or the corresponding information. Is output externally as predetermined information. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect corresponding to the corresponding effect by the external effect means outside the gaming machine. Further, even if there are many types of correspondence information, the information for directing is output externally as a command, so that it is possible to flexibly respond to the many types of correspondence information.

Feature A76. The gaming machine according to feature A75, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the corresponding information by using the plurality of terminals.

According to the feature A76, since the corresponding information is also used as the information for external output, it is not necessary to prepare the information for external output as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature A77. The game according to feature A75 or A76, wherein the communication method when information is output by the predetermined output means is the same as the communication method when the corresponding information is transmitted by the corresponding information transmitting means. Machine.

According to the feature A77, the information can be output externally by using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A78. The external output means is another output means (main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment) that outputs information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing by using one terminal provided in the external output terminal. The gaming machine according to any one of features A71 to A77, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the process of step S2507 and step S2508.

According to the feature A78, it is possible to diversify the output mode when the information corresponding to the content of the effect is externally output.

Features A79. The gaming machine according to feature A79, wherein the separate output means is characterized in that the type of output information is different by differentiating the output duration of information using the one terminal.

According to the feature A79, even when the information is externally output using one terminal, it is possible to externally output a plurality of types of information according to the content of the effect.

Feature A80. An effect executing means (display / light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing an effect, and
The effect control means (sound / light side MPU82 and display side MPU92) that control the execution of the effect in the effect execution means, and
External output means for outputting information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means to the outside of the gaming machine (in the first embodiment, the external output process at the start of fluctuation and the external output setting at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62). A function to execute processing, a function to execute the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute an external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment. The gaming machine is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound and light side MPU 82, and a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature A80, since the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect execution means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute the effect related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to One or more of I8 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. An effect executing means (display / light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing an effect, and
The effect control means (sound / light side MPU82 or display side MPU92) that controls the execution of the effect in the effect execution means,
External output means for outputting information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means to the outside of the gaming machine (in the first embodiment, the external output process at the start of fluctuation and the external output setting at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62). A function to execute processing, a function to execute the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute an external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment. And the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound / light side MPU 82, and the function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).
Equipped with
The effect control means is a predetermined effect control means (sound and light) that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game rotation) corresponding to the start trigger is executed when the predetermined start trigger is reached. It has a function to execute light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the side MPU 82, and a function to execute V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92).
The external output means outputs specific information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect after the predetermined effect is started in the effect executing means (at the time of starting the bonus in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment). A function of executing the external output setting process of the above, a function of executing the process of step S2216 in the sound / light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound / light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, since the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect execution means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute the effect related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if the player overlooks the predetermined effect in the effect execution means, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to confirm the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect again. Further, when the effect is executed by shifting the time so that the game machine side is the front side and the game machine outside side is the rear side, it is possible to relate the contents of the effect.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information after the predetermined effect is completed in the effect executing means.

According to the feature B2, it is possible to prevent the effect outside the gaming machine based on the external output of the specific information and the predetermined effect in the effect execution means from overlapping in time. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to each production.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the specific information includes information that enables the entire content of at least a part of the effect range of the predetermined effect to be specified.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the entire effect range of the predetermined effect by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who missed the part of the effect range with an opportunity to confirm the part of the effect range again.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the specific information includes information that enables the entire effect content of the predetermined effect to be specified.

According to the feature B4, it is possible to reproduce the entire effect content of the predetermined effect by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who missed the predetermined effect again with an opportunity to confirm the predetermined effect.

Feature B5. The effect control means is the effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the sound light side MPU 82) that determines the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the control information transmitted by the specific control means (main side MPU 62). The function of executing the process of steps S1203 to S1206, the function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment are executed. Function)
The specific output means is used as the specific information to determine the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that triggered the determination of the effect content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it outputs information including information to be played.

According to the feature B5, in the configuration in which the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed by the external effect means outside the gaming machine, the control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the specific information to be output to the outside of the game machine. It becomes possible.

Feature B6. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
As the control information, the specific control means is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, and is information that enables the predetermined effect control means to derive the effect content of the predetermined effect. The variable command) is transmitted to the effect content determining means, and separately, the second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determining means. ,
The specific output means outputs, as the specific information, information including the first control information or information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while the second control. The gaming machine according to feature B5, which is characterized in that it does not output information.

According to the feature B6, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it is possible to carefully confirm the result of the privilege lottery process in the effect content determining means. .. In this case, the first control information or the information corresponding to the first control information is externally output as specific information to the outside of the gaming machine, while the second control information is not externally output. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside while enabling the execution of the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the specific control means has the specific output means.

According to the feature B7, since the specific control means existing on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to consolidate the functions of managing the operation of the gaming machine into the specific control means. Will be.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the effect control means has the specific output means.

According to the feature B8, since the specific information is externally output from the effect control means, the specific information is externally output so that the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means can be specified. Is possible. As a result, the entire predetermined effect can be reproduced by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine.

Feature B9. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege grant is won in the privilege lottery process, the special transition means (processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is performed. Function to execute) and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the predetermined effect.
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the effect control means measures the effect execution means so that the special effect corresponding to the special gaming state is executed after the predetermined effect is executed. Special effect control means to be controlled (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1211 to S1220 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the processing of steps S2210 to S2218 in the sound light side MPU 82 is executed. A function to execute the processing of steps S2605 to S2613 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information when the special effect is started.

According to the feature B9, when the special gaming state is executed in the gaming machine, the external effect means outside the gaming machine can execute the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect immediately before that. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game during the special game state. Further, when the external effect means outside the gaming machine reproduces at least a part of the effect range of the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect to be reproduced is performed before the transition to the special gaming state. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a predetermined effect.

Feature B10. As the special gaming state, the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode of high frequency winning mode) in which the duration is relatively long and the second special gaming state (low frequency winning mode) in which the duration is relatively short Open / close execution mode) is set,
The specific output means according to feature B9, characterized in that the specific output means outputs the specific information in the case of the first special gaming state and does not output the specific information in the case of the second special gaming state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature B10, specific information is output externally when a state having a relatively long duration among the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state is started, so that an effect for reproducing a predetermined effect is achieved. The effect will be executed only when the period for performing the above is secured.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information in the case of the special gaming state in which the duration is longer than the duration of the predetermined effect. ..

According to the feature B11, in the external effect means, the effect is executed only when the period for performing the effect for reproducing the predetermined effect is secured.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A80, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to One or more configurations of I8 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Production processing execution means for executing production processing for executing production corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing (function for executing special figure variation start processing in main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82 and display side) MPU92) and
The relational output means (first) for externally outputting the relational production information for enabling the external production means (external device EX) existing outside the gaming machine to execute the external production corresponding to the processing result of the production processing. In the embodiment, the function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation and the external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62, and the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 and the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of step S2704 in the main MPU 62. Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
There is no display means for performing a reach effect to teach the player the degree of expectation that the privilege has been won.
A gaming machine characterized in that the reach effect can be performed in the external effect of the external effect means.

According to the feature C1, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Further, since the gaming machine is not equipped with the effect means having the function of executing the reach effect, the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified. In this case, since the function of executing the reach effect is performed by the external effect means, it is possible to provide the reach effect to the player.

Feature C2. It is provided with an effect executing means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing the effect.
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means that controls the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the effect process. It is equipped with a function to execute light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function to execute V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92).
The relational output means is characterized in that it outputs the relational effect information in order to enable the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect to be executed in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature C2, since the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect is executed in the situation where the predetermined effect is executed by the external effect means, it is possible to perform the mutually related effects at the same time, and the effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to both the means and the external production means.

Feature C3. A specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means is provided.
The effect processing execution means determines the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the transmission of control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process by the specific control means as the effect process. (In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82, the third In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82) is provided.
The relational output means is characterized in that it outputs information including the control information or information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information as the relationship effect information. The gaming machine described in C2.

According to the feature C3, in a configuration in which the execution control of the predetermined effect is performed by the predetermined effect control means based on the control of the specific control means, it is possible to execute the external effect by using the control information transmitted by the specific control means. Will be.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the specific control means has the related output means.

According to the feature C4, since the specific control means existing on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to consolidate the functions of managing the operation of the gaming machine into the specific control means. Will be. Further, it is possible to externally output the relational effect information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information in the specific control means.

Feature C5. A specific control means (main side MPU62) having the privilege lottery means is provided.
The effect processing execution means corresponds to the type of control information based on the fact that the specific control means transmits control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect process. The effect content determining means for executing the effect content lottery process for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S1204 and S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82 are performed. It has a function to execute, a function to execute the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment).
The relational output means outputs information corresponding to the result of the effect content lottery process as the relationship effect information.
The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the effect content determining means has the related output means.

According to the feature C5, since it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process executed by the effect content determination means as the relationship effect information, the relationship effect corresponds to the entire predetermined effect. It becomes possible to execute the production. Further, since the related effect information is output externally from the effect content determining means, the configuration for outputting the related effect information based on the result of the effect content lottery process can be simplified.

Feature C6. The external effect means is a pattern display means for variablely displaying a pattern.
The effect C2 to C5, wherein the effect executing means is at least one of a sound output means (speaker unit 54) for executing a sound output effect and a light emitting means (display light emitting unit 53) for executing a light emitting effect. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature C6, it is possible to perform a sound output effect or a light emission effect related to the pattern display means provided outside the gaming machine on the gaming machine, and the effects on the gaming machine and each effect means outside the gaming machine are mutually produced. It becomes possible to relate to.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the external effect means is an embodiment corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process after the unit effect is executed.

According to the feature C7, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means and to notify the result. As a result, even if the gaming machine does not have the effect means having these functions, the function is fulfilled by the external effect means.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the front portion of the gaming machine is capable of arranging the external effect means in front of the front portion of the gaming machine.

According to the feature C8, when the external effect means is used as the effect means of the gaming machine, the external effect means can be arranged at a position easily recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the external effect means can be paid. It will be possible to increase.

Feature C9. A window portion (window portion 51) is formed on the front portion of the gaming machine so that the gaming area formed inside the gaming machine can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the front portion of the gaming machine is capable of arranging the external effect means at a position facing the window portion in front of the window portion.

According to the feature C9, the external effect means can be arranged at a position easily visible to the player, and the degree of attention to the external effect means can be increased.

Feature C10. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Production processing execution means for executing production processing for executing production corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery processing (function for executing special figure variation start processing in main side MPU 62, sound light side MPU 82 and display side) MPU92) and
The relational output means (first) for externally outputting the relational production information for enabling the external production means (external device EX) existing outside the gaming machine to execute the external production corresponding to the processing result of the production processing. In the embodiment, the function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation and the external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62, and the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 and the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of step S2704 in the main MPU 62. Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
The front portion of the gaming machine is a gaming machine characterized in that the external effect means can be arranged in front of the front portion of the gaming machine.

According to the feature C10, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the external effect means is used as the effect means of the gaming machine, the external effect means can be arranged at a position easily recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the external effect means can be increased. It becomes.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C10, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to One or more configurations of I8 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature A group, the feature B group, and the feature C group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. When the winning result is obtained, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. When the state is one of the predetermined state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) and the non-predetermined state on the corresponding side, the effect content of the first effect and the effect content of the second effect. Corresponding control means for controlling so that regularity is generated between the two (a function of executing the process of step S1707 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, and step S2507 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). Function to execute the processing of) and
In the case of the non-corresponding side, which is the other of the predetermined state and the non-predetermined state, the regularity does not occur between the effect content of the first effect and the effect content of the second effect. Non-compliant control means for controlling so as to be (a function of executing the process of step S1708 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2508 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, there are cases where regularity occurs between the first effect and the second effect and cases where it does not occur, depending on whether or not the state is a predetermined state. As a result, by confirming the correspondence between the two effects, it becomes possible to grasp or predict whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, and to draw the player's attention to both the first effect and the second effect. Is possible. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature D2. As the gaming state, there are a first state (high probability mode) in which the privilege is relatively easy to be given to the player and a second state (low probability mode) in which the privilege is hard to be given.
The predetermined state is a state in which the player is in the first state, and the player cannot or is difficult to identify which of the first state and the second state is the notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it is in a state of being in a state of being.

According to the feature D2, even in a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine is in the first state, the first effect is confirmed by confirming the correspondence between the first effect and the second effect. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is in a state. In this case, the player pays attention to both the first effect and the second effect in order to grasp whether or not the player is in the first state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature D3. Judgment means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and having at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the privilege grant is relatively high or low as a determination mode ( (Function to execute the process of step S403 in the main MPU 62) and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege to the player according to the determination result of the determination means, and
Equipped with
The predetermined state is a state in which the high-probability mode is set, and the player cannot or is difficult to identify which of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode is the notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it is in the state of.

According to the feature D3, even in a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether or not the gaming machine is in the high probability mode, by confirming the correspondence between the first and second effects. , It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is a high probability mode. In this case, the player pays attention to both the first effect and the second effect in order to grasp whether or not the mode is in the high probability mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature D4. When a specific event (small hit result) that can occur in the process of progressing the game occurs, the state in which one of the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means is controlled is changed to the state in which the other is controlled. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, which is characterized by being changed.

According to the feature D4, since the change in the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means is triggered by the occurrence of a specific event, the trigger is easy for the player to understand.

Feature D5. The state of the corresponding side is a state that is not the predetermined state, and the state of the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state.
The non-corresponding control means is the effect content of the first effect when the gaming machine is in the predetermined state and a specific event (small hit result) that can occur in the process of progressing the game occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the regularity is controlled so as not to occur with the effect content of the second effect.

According to the feature D5, when a specific event occurs in a situation where the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, both the first effect and the second effect do not correspond to each other. As a result, the player who confirms that both effects do not correspond to each other can grasp that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, and can increase the degree of attention to both effects.

Feature D6. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided in the game area where the game ball flows down and which can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and
A determination means (a function of executing the process of step S403 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether or not to shift the game state, and
A transition means (a function of executing a special figure determination process in the main MPU 62) that shifts the gaming state to a state in which the opening / closing control is executed according to the determination result of the determination means.
Equipped with
The determination means determines that the determination means is a specific determination result (small hit result) that does not change the mode that affects the player's profit before and after the end of the state, although the transition to the state in which the opening / closing control is executed occurs. Equipped with possible specific judgment means
The gaming machine according to feature D4 or D5, wherein the specific event results in the specific determination result.

According to the feature D6, it is possible to increase the advantage for the player when a specific determination result is obtained. In addition, it is possible to use the specific judgment result as an opportunity to change the correspondence between the first execution and the second effect, and the configuration is simplified and the design is simplified as compared with the configuration in which a new opportunity is set. It is possible to facilitate the process.

Feature D7. The state of the corresponding side is a state that is not the predetermined state, and the state of the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state.
The second effect is any one of the features D1 to D6, which is an effect capable of notifying in advance the type of the first effect that occurs after the second effect is started. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature D7, since the first effect is notified in advance in the second effect, the player can predict or grasp the content of the first effect that occurs after the second effect by confirming the second effect. Will be. In this case, if a specific event occurs in a situation where the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, an event occurs in which the content of the advance notification performed as the second effect and the content of the subsequent first effect do not match. .. The player who confirms this event not only recognizes that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, but also feels a surprise at the disagreement between the two effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D8. The corresponding control means is such that the same or corresponding character as the character displayed in the first effect is displayed in the second effect.
The non-correspondence control means is any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that a character different from or not corresponding to the character displayed in the first effect is displayed in the second effect. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature D8, the correspondence relationship between the first effect and the second effect is changed by changing the type of the displayed character. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the correspondence has been changed by the relatively simple configuration.

Feature D9. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
A game turn control means (main side MPU 62) that controls a game turn operation means (special figure display unit 37a) so as to execute a game turn operation that corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process after executing the unit effect. (Function to execute the process of step S306 to step S308) in
Equipped with
The first effect and the second effect are different from each other in the execution times of the game rotation operation, and when controlled by the corresponding control means, the following is the effect content of the first effect. When the effect contents set in the order of are selected as the effect contents of the second effect and are controlled by the non-compliant control means, they are set in the following order with respect to the effect contents of the first effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the effect content is not selected as the effect content of the second effect.

According to the feature D9, it is predicted or confirmed whether or not it is in a predetermined state by confirming the selection order of the effect contents between the first effect and the second effect that occur in different execution times of the game round operation. It becomes possible to pay attention to the effect over a plurality of execution times of the game round operation.

Feature D10. An effect executing means (display / light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and symbol display device 41) capable of executing the first effect, and
The effect control means (sound / light side MPU82 and display side MPU92) that control the execution of the effect in the effect execution means, and
A relational output means for outputting relational effect information for enabling the second effect corresponding to the first effect in the effect execution means in the external effect means (external device EX) existing outside the gaming machine (external device EX). In the first embodiment, the function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation and the external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 is performed. A function to execute, a function to execute an external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, a function to execute the process in step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment. (Function to execute the process of step S2704) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9.

According to the feature D10, since the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect execution means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute the effect related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Further, by comparing the first effect in the effect execution means and the second effect in the external effect means, it is possible to confirm whether or not both effects correspond to each other. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to both the effect executing means and the external effect means.

Feature D11. The relational output means has the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means.
The correspondence control means outputs, as the relational effect information, information for associating the second effect in the external effect means with the first effect in the effect execution means.
Described in feature D10, the non-corresponding control means outputs information for not associating the second effect of the external effect means with the first effect of the effect executing means as the related effect information. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D11, by adjusting the effect content in the external effect means, it is possible to create a situation in which both the effect execution means and the external effect means correspond to each other and a situation in which they do not correspond. .. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the effect execution means and the external effect means while not affecting the effect execution mode in the effect execution means.

Feature D12. The effect control means is
The process of step S1203 to step S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82 is executed in the effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the effect content is determined based on the control information received from the specific control means (main side MPU 62). The function, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82).
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in the sound / light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that the first effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determining means is executed. A function to execute processing and sound output control processing, and a function to execute V interrupt processing on the display side MPU 92),
Equipped with
The relational output means outputs the relational effect information for enabling the second effect corresponding to the predetermined effect to be executed in a situation where the first effect is being executed.
The gaming machine according to feature D11, wherein the effect content determining means grasps the execution continuation period of the predetermined effect based on the control information.

According to the feature D12, since the predetermined effect is executed over the execution continuation period corresponding to the control information transmitted from the specific control means, it is difficult to change the effect content. On the other hand, when the correspondence between the effect execution means and the external effect means is changed, the effect content of the external effect means is changed. Therefore, when the correspondence between the two effects is changed, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased, and the correspondence between the two effects can be appropriately changed.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D12, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to One or more of I8 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. Judgment means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and having at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the privilege grant is relatively high or low as a determination mode ( (Function to execute the process of step S403 in the main MPU 62) and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege to the player according to the determination result of the determination means, and
A transition means for shifting the determination mode to the high probability mode (a function of executing the game state transition process in the main MPU 62) and
In the high probability mode, after the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the end reference number, the termination means for ending the high probability mode (a function of executing the mode transition process in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of termination reference times.

According to the feature E1, the player not only enters the high-probability mode, but also plays the game while expecting to enter the high-probability mode with a larger number of end reference times. Therefore, it is possible to suitably raise the expectation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. A specific ball entry unit (second operating port 34) configured so that the game ball can enter and can be switched between the open state and the closed state, respectively.
Acceptance control means (a function to execute the normal power control process in the main MPU 62) that controls the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
Equipped with
The determination means makes the determination based on the case where the game ball enters the specific entry portion.
The acceptance control means has a relatively low chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state. It has at least a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
The gaming state includes the first gaming state, which is the high probability mode, the high frequency switching mode, and ends after the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the corresponding end reference number of times.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein a plurality of types of gaming states having different end reference times are set as the first gaming state.

According to the feature E2, the player not only enters the first gaming state, but also plays the game while expecting to enter the first gaming state with a larger number of end reference times. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of expectation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E3. A specific ball entry unit (second operating port 34) configured so that the game ball can enter and can be switched between the open state and the closed state, respectively.
Acceptance control means (a function to execute the normal power control process in the main MPU 62) that controls the state of the specific ball entry unit, and
Equipped with
The determination means makes the determination based on the case where the game ball enters the specific entry portion.
The acceptance control means has a relatively low chance of not being in the open state or being in the open state per unit time as a switching mode for switching the specific ball entry portion between the open state and the closed state. It has at least a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the chance of the open state per unit time is relatively high.
The gaming states include the first gaming state, which is the high-probability mode and the high-frequency switching mode, and ends after the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the corresponding end reference number of times, and the high-probability mode. The low frequency switching mode includes a second gaming state in which the number of determinations by the determination means ends after the corresponding end reference number is reached.
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the first gaming state includes a gaming state in which the ending reference number of times is less than the ending reference number of times of the second gaming state.

According to the feature E3, even in the second gaming state, the number of termination reference times may be larger than in the case of the first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the second gaming state, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the second gaming state will occur.

Feature E4. If the determination means occurs in the low frequency switching mode, the transition to the second gaming state is generated, and if the determination means occurs in the high frequency switching mode, the transition to the first gaming state is generated (predetermined determination result). Equipped with a predetermined determination means that can determine that it is an unspecified high-accuracy jackpot result)
The first gaming state that shifts when the predetermined determination result is obtained in the high frequency switching mode is the end criterion as compared with the case of the first gaming state that shifts based on the other specific determination result. The gaming machine according to feature E3, which is characterized by a large number of times.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to increase the advantage of obtaining a predetermined determination result in the high frequency switching mode, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the predetermined determination result will occur.

Feature E5. A variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered and can be switched between an open state and a closed state.
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and
Equipped with
The privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the opening / closing control is executed according to the determination result of the determination means.
The special gaming state includes a special gaming state with a high ball entry frequency in which the frequency of entry into the variable ball entry means is relatively high and low, and a special gaming state with a low ball entry frequency.
The high-probability mode that occurs after the special gaming state with a low ball entry frequency has a larger number of termination reference times than the high-probability mode that occurs after the special gaming state with a high ball entry frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the means for increasing the number of times is provided.

According to the feature E5, the number of times of the end reference of the high probability mode may be larger than that in the case of the special game state of high ball entry frequency even in the special game state of low ball entry frequency. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of generating a special gaming state of low-frequency entry, and it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the special gaming state of low-frequency entry will occur.

Feature E6. One of the features E1 to E5, which is characterized by having an expectation degree notifying means (a function of executing an ending correspondence process in the sound light side MPU 82) for notifying the expectation degree that the number of times of the end reference number is large. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that a large number of end reference times are selected.

Feature E7. It is provided with a number-corresponding output means (a function of executing the process of step S2003 in the main MPU 62) to output the number-of-times corresponding information (count-corresponding command) which is the information of the end reference number of times or the corresponding information to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature E7, the end reference number of times can be managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the end reference number of times by an external effect means provided outside the gaming machine.

Feature E8. The feature of the number-corresponding output means is that it does not output information specifying the end reference number of times, but outputs indirect information corresponding to the end reference number of times as the number of times correspondence information. The gaming machine described in E7.

According to the feature E8, when the effect corresponding to the end reference number of times is executed by the external effect means outside the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the end reference number from being specified by the external effect means. Become. As a result, for example, even if a communication abnormality occurs in the output of the number of times correspondence information, it is possible to prevent the abnormal end reference number of times from being specified, and it is difficult for the player to be confused.

Feature E9. Predetermined effect control means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the sound light side MPU 82) controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed. The function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1207, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the processing of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function)
The feature E7 or E8 is characterized in that the number-of-times corresponding output means outputs the number-of-times correspondence information after the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature E9, before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, it corresponds to the effect of clearly indicating the end reference number of times by the external effect means outside the gaming machine and the end reference number of times. It is prevented that the production is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the end reference number of times by the external effect means while not impairing the function of executing the predetermined effect.

Feature E10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
An actuated ball entry portion (first actuating port 33) through which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
It is determined whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the activated ball entry portion, and the probability that the determination result corresponding to the privilege grant is obtained as the determination mode is relatively high or low. A determination means having at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode (a function of executing the process of step S403 in the main MPU 62) and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege to the player according to the determination result of the determination means, and
A transition means for shifting the determination mode to the high probability mode (a function of executing the game state transition process in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of termination conditions for the high probability mode.

According to the feature E10, the player not only enters the high-probability mode, but also plays the game while expecting the high-probability mode to continue for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to suitably raise the expectation of the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features E1 to E10, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to One or more of I8 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature D group and the feature E group can solve the following problems.

For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine draws a lot based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions, and when the lottery result is a predetermined result, a transition to a winning state occurs. do. Further, as the winning / losing lottery mode, there is also known a gaming machine in which a plurality of modes such as a high probability mode and a low probability mode exist so that the probability of a predetermined winning result is relatively high or low. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting that the mode has a high probability of winning.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, for example, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry section provided in a game area, and if a winning result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery, a display device is used. It is known that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device. Further, it is also known that the winning / losing lottery mode is set to one of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, for example, after the special gaming state is completed. In the high-probability mode, for example, an effect different from that in the low-probability mode is executed on the display surface, or an operation different from that in the low-probability mode is executed in the movable member provided in the game area. As a result, the player plays the game while recognizing that the mode of the winning / failing lottery is the high probability mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. An effect executing means (display / light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing an effect, and
A function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, the third embodiment, which determines the effect content based on the control information transmitted by the specific control means (main side MPU 62). In the form, the function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound / light side MPU 82) and
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in the sound / light side MPU 82) that controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) is executed in a manner corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. A function to execute processing and sound output control processing, and a function to execute V interrupt processing on the display side MPU 92),
A function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the predetermined output means for outputting the predetermined information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect executing means to the outside of the gaming machine (in the second embodiment). , The function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect content determining means has the predetermined output means.

According to the feature F1, since the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect execution means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute the effect related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. .. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the predetermined information is externally output from the effect content determining means, it is possible to externally output the predetermined information so that the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means can be specified. Become. This makes it possible to perform an effect related to the entire effect content of the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature F2. The specific control means is
A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F1, which is characterized by having.

Since the effect F1 configuration is provided and the effect content determining means externally outputs predetermined information, the effect is produced while reducing the processing load of the specific control means that executes the privilege lottery process and the process for granting the privilege. It is possible to execute an effect related to the effect in the execution means outside the gaming machine.

Feature F3. The predetermined output means is used as the predetermined information to determine the effect content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that triggered the determination of the effect content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, which outputs information including information to be played.

According to the feature F3, in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to a predetermined effect can be executed by an external effect means outside the gaming machine, control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as predetermined information to be output to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible.

Features F4. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
As the control information, the specific control means is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, and is information that enables the predetermined effect control means to derive the effect content of the predetermined effect. The variable command) is transmitted to the effect content determining means, and separately, the second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determining means. ,
The predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, information including the first control information or information used for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while the second control. The gaming machine according to feature F3, which is characterized in that it does not output information.

According to the feature F4, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it is possible to carefully confirm the result of the privilege lottery process in the effect content determining means. .. In this case, the first control information or the information corresponding thereto is externally output as predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, while the second control information is not externally output. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside while enabling the execution of the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature F5. The effect content determining means is an effect lottery means for executing an effect content lottery process for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (step in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment). It has a function of executing the process of S2207, and in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82).
The effect lottery means executes the effect content lottery process in an manner corresponding to the type of control information.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined output means outputs information corresponding to the result of the effect content lottery process as the predetermined information.

According to the feature F5, since it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process, it is possible to grasp the entire effect content of the predetermined effect on the device outside the gaming machine.

Feature F6. When the effect content determining means receives the control information and executes the predetermined effect, the effect information transmission unit transmits the corresponding information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92). (In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 in the sound light side MPU 82).
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect of the mode corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the corresponding information as the predetermined information.

According to the feature F6, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control means based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means is external as predetermined information. It is output. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare predetermined information as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity. Further, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for externally outputting the predetermined information, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature F7. The communication method (serial communication) when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output means is the same as the communication method (serial communication) when the corresponding information is transmitted by the corresponding information transmitting means. The gaming machine according to the feature F6.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to externally output the predetermined information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information to the correspondence effect control means. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature F8. One of the features F1 to F7, wherein the predetermined output means outputs midway information (exit command) corresponding to the effect content during the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature F8, it is possible to execute the corresponding effect by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine during the execution of the predetermined effect. Further, since the configuration of the above-mentioned feature F1 is provided and the effect content determining means outputs externally, it becomes easy to specify the timing of external output during the execution of the predetermined effect, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. Is planned.

Features F9. The specific control means includes a specific side output means (a function of executing step S602, step S803, step S809, step S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62) that outputs information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8.

According to the feature F9, in the configuration in which the information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the specific control means, the external output of the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is performed by the effect content determining means. By setting this, it is possible to distribute the main body of the external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform external output.

Feature F10. The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein the communication method when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output means is different from the communication method when the information is output by the output means on the specific side. ..

According to the feature F10, since the communication method differs depending on the type of information to be output externally, it is possible to perform external output in accordance with the nature of the information, and it is possible to preferably perform external output. ..

Features F11. The output means on the specific side outputs information through an external output means (external terminal board 79).
The gaming machine according to feature F9 or F10, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information through the external output terminal board.

According to the feature F11, it is possible to consolidate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine into the external output means. This facilitates wiring work for external output.

Feature F12. The output means on the specific side uses one terminal in the external output means when outputting one piece of information to the outside.
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the predetermined output means utilizes a plurality of terminals in the external output means for external output of the predetermined information.

According to the feature F12, since the number of terminals for the specific control means to output the state of the gaming machine to the outside is one terminal, even if there are a plurality of types of states of the gaming machine to be externally output. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. On the other hand, since the predetermined effect control means has a plurality of terminals for externally outputting the information corresponding to the content of the effect, the information can be output as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of information output externally.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F12, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to One or more of I8 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. An effect executing means (display / light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of executing an effect, and
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control process in the sound / light side MPU 82) that controls the effect executing means so that the predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the start trigger is executed when the predetermined start trigger is reached. And the function to execute the sound output control process, and the function to execute the V interrupt process on the display side MPU 92),
When the first timing is reached in relation to the predetermined effect, the first predetermined output means (first embodiment) that outputs the first predetermined information including the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect to the outside of the gaming machine. The external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the process of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. Function to execute) and
A second predetermined output means (first embodiment) that outputs second predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect to the outside of the gaming machine when the second timing is reached in relation to the predetermined effect. Then, the function of executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the process of step S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the step in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function to execute the processing of S2611) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect is externally output as the first predetermined information and the second predetermined information at different timings. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect corresponding to each timing by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect executed by the external effect means. ..

Feature G2. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed.
The first predetermined output means has information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the first timing, which is a timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. It outputs the first predetermined information including
The second predetermined output means includes information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the second timing, which is after the timing when the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that it outputs a second predetermined information.

According to the feature G2, there is an opportunity to be externally output at each of the timing before and the timing after the effect content of the effect execution means becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. As a result, it becomes possible to perform the production by the external production means in different modes depending on whether or not the production content corresponds to the result of the privilege lottery process, and to diversify the production by the external production means. It becomes possible.

Feature G3. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the second predetermined information has a larger amount of information of the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the first predetermined information than the first predetermined information.

In a situation where the effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means does not correspond to the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, in order not to impair the function of executing the predetermined effect. It is not preferable that more information than necessary about the production content of the predetermined production is provided by the external production means. On the other hand, if the production content of the predetermined production is after the production content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, even if a lot of information about the production content of the predetermined production is provided by the external production means, the predetermined production can be performed. It is preferable because it does not impair the function of being executed, and on the contrary, it is possible to perform various effects by external effect means. Then, in such a situation, the second predetermined information has a larger amount of information of the production content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information, so that the external information is appropriate at each timing. It is possible to output.

Features G4. The first predetermined output means does not use information that can specify the entire contents of the predetermined effect, but uses information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect as the first predetermined information. It is to output
The second predetermined output means outputs information that makes it possible to specify the entire contents of the predetermined effect, or information corresponding to a larger range of effects than in the case of the first predetermined information, as the second predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature G4, since the first predetermined information is output externally, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. It becomes. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly shown by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, it is possible to reproduce the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means by the external effect means, and the predetermined effect is given to the player who missed the predetermined effect. It will be possible to give an opportunity to confirm again.

Feature G5. The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information common to a plurality of types of the predetermined effects.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs individual second predetermined information for a plurality of types of the predetermined effects.

According to the feature G5, when the first predetermined information is externally output, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to a common effect content for a plurality of types of predetermined effects by an external effect means, and a second predetermined effect. When the information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform the effect corresponding to each predetermined effect by the external effect means.

Feature G6. The predetermined effect control means can select a plurality of types of effect contents for the predetermined effect determining element as the effect content of the predetermined effect, but is common to the predetermined effect derived from the predetermined effect determining element. The production content is selected so that the production content is included.
The first predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the common effect content, but does not include information that clearly indicates the non-common effect content.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the second predetermined information includes at least information indicating the non-common effect content.

According to the feature G6, since the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the common effect content in the predetermined effect by the external effect means outside the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly shown by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, it is possible to reproduce the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means by the external effect means, and the predetermined effect is given to the player who missed the predetermined effect. It will be possible to give an opportunity to confirm again.

Feature G7. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed.
The first predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect as the first predetermined information, and is the predetermined in both cases where the privilege granting is won or not in the privilege lottery process. It outputs information corresponding to the content of the production that can be executed as the production.
The second predetermined output means, as the second predetermined information, is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect, and corresponds to the effect content that differs depending on whether or not the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, which is characterized in that it outputs information to be played.

According to the feature G7, since the first predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and not clearly indicating the result of the privilege lottery process by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. .. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the privilege lottery process from being clearly shown by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and clearly indicating the result of the privilege lottery process by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible to reproduce the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means by the external effect means, and it is possible to give the player who missed the predetermined effect an opportunity to confirm the predetermined effect again. Become.

Features G8. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed.
The first predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process, and the second predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G7.

According to the feature G8, there are cases where the result of the privilege lottery process is not specified in the external effect means outside the gaming machine and the case where the result of the privilege lottery process is specified. It is possible to make it happen. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production performed by the external production means.

Feature G9. A privilege lottery means (a function of executing a special figure change start process in the main MPU 62) for executing a privilege lottery process for whether or not to grant a privilege to a player, and
When the privilege granting is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (the function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed.
There are multiple types of benefits granted by the privilege granting means.
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information without including information indicating the type of the privilege.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information so as to include information indicating the type of the privilege.

According to the feature G9, there are cases where the external production means outside the gaming machine does not specify the type of privilege, and cases where the type of privilege is specified. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production performed by the external production means.

Feature G10. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect for a predetermined continuation period.
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information without including information indicating the predetermined duration.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information so as to include information indicating the predetermined duration.

According to the feature G10, there are cases where the external effect means outside the gaming machine performs the effect in a manner not based on the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect, and cases where the effect is performed in a mode based on the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect. It is possible to give rise to each. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production performed by the external production means.

Feature G11. The effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, steps S1203 to step S1203 in the sound light side MPU 82) for determining the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the transmission of the control information by the specific control means (main side MPU 62). It has a function of executing the process of S1206, a function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment). ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, wherein the effect content determining means has the second predetermined output means.

According to the feature G11, since it is easier for the effect content determining means to grasp the details of the effect content of the predetermined effect than the specific control means, the effect content determining means has the second predetermined output means, so that the first predetermined information and the first predetermined information can be obtained. 2 It becomes easy to make the amount of information about the production content of the predetermined production different from that of the predetermined information.

Feature G12. When the effect content determining means receives the control information and executes the predetermined effect, the effect information transmission unit transmits the corresponding information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92). (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the sound light side. A function to execute the process of step S2604 in the MPU 82) is provided.
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means so that the corresponding effect in the mode corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The gaming machine according to feature G11, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the corresponding information as the second predetermined information.

According to the feature G12, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control means based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining means, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means is the second predetermined information. Is output externally as. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the second predetermined information as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity. Further, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for externally outputting the second predetermined information, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature G13. The feature G12 characterized in that the communication method when the second predetermined information is output by the second predetermined output means is the same as the communication method when the corresponding information is transmitted by the corresponding information transmitting means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature G13, it is possible to externally output the second predetermined information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information to the correspondence effect control means, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature G14. The gaming machine according to any one of features G11 to G13, wherein the specific control means has the first predetermined output means.

According to the feature G14, since the specific control means externally outputs the first predetermined information and the effect content determining means externally outputs the second predetermined information, the subject of the external output is distributed according to the function of each control means. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform external output.

Feature G15. The gaming machine according to feature G14, wherein the first predetermined output means and the second predetermined output means output information through the same external output means (external terminal board 79).

According to the feature G15, it is possible to consolidate the parts for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine into the external output means. This facilitates wiring work for external output.

Feature G16. The first predetermined output means utilizes one terminal in the external output means at the time of external output of the first predetermined information.
The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the second predetermined output means utilizes a plurality of terminals in the external output means for external output of the predetermined information.

According to the feature G16, since the number of terminals for the specific control means to output the first predetermined information to the outside is one terminal, the number of terminals is suppressed while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. It becomes possible. On the other hand, since the effect content determining means has a plurality of terminals for externally outputting the second predetermined information, the information can be output as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of predetermined information output to the outside.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features G1 to G16, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to One or more of I8 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature F group and the feature G group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. When the winning result is obtained, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. External output means (external terminal board 79) for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, and
Using one terminal provided in the external output means, the first output means (step S602, step S803, step S809, step S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62 for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine is executed. Function) and
A second output means for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine by using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means (in the first embodiment, an external output process and a bonus at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62). A function to execute the external output setting process at the start, a function to execute the processes of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. (Function to execute the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, when the information is output to the outside of the gaming machine, the information is output to the outside by using one terminal provided in the external output means, and the information is output to the external output means. It may be output externally using a plurality of provided terminals. According to the former external output, it is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. On the other hand, according to the latter external output, it is possible to output information as a command. As a result, it becomes possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of information output to the outside, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the external output.

Feature H2. The first output means uses one terminal provided in the external output means to output information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine.
Described in feature H1 characterized in that the second output means outputs information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means by using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means. Gaming machine.

According to the feature H2, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the gaming machine is one, even if there are multiple types of states of the gaming machine to be externally output, the external output is performed. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the above. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect control means is plurality, the information can be output as a command. This makes it possible to flexibly respond to the diversification of the types of information output externally.

Feature H3. It is equipped with an effect control means (sound / light side MPU82) that controls the execution of the effect in the effect execution means.
The effect control means receives control information from another control means (main side MPU 62) and controls information to another control means (display side MPU 92) when executing a predetermined effect (effect for game rounds). Is to send
The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the second output means outputs the control information or information corresponding to the control information by using the plurality of terminals.

According to the feature H3, even if there are many types of the control information in the configuration in which the control information used when executing the predetermined effect or the information corresponding to the control information is output externally, the information for the effect is used. Is output externally as a command, so it is possible to flexibly respond to the large number of types of control information.

Features H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the second output means outputs the control information by using the plurality of terminals.

According to the feature H4, since the control information is also used as the information for the external output, it is not necessary to prepare the information for the external output as the dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature H5. The communication method when the information is output by the second output means is the same as the communication method when the control information is transmitted between the effect control means and the other control means. Features The gaming machine according to H3 or H4.

According to the feature H5, the information can be output to the outside by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature H6. The effect control means is
Predetermined effect control means (first and fourth embodiments) that controls the effect executing means so that the predetermined effect (effect for game rounds) corresponding to the start trigger is executed when the predetermined start trigger is reached. Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1207 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing the processing of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the step in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function to execute the processing of S2602) and
Corresponding information transmitting means (in the first embodiment, step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 82) that transmits the corresponding information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when the predetermined effect is executed. In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound / light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 in the sound / light side MPU 82).
Equipped with
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (design display device 41) so that the corresponding effect of the mode corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The effect control means has the second output means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, wherein the second output means outputs the corresponding information or the corresponding information.

According to the feature H6, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control means based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect control means, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control means or the corresponding information is It is output externally as predetermined information. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect corresponding to the corresponding effect by the external effect means outside the gaming machine. Further, even if there are many types of correspondence information, the information for directing is output externally as a command, so that it is possible to flexibly respond to the many types of correspondence information.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the second output means outputs the corresponding information by using the plurality of terminals.

According to the feature H7, since the corresponding information is also used as the information for external output, it is not necessary to prepare the information for external output as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature H8. The communication method when the information is output by the second output means is the same as the communication method when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmission means according to the feature H6 or H7. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H8, the information can be output externally by using the processing configuration for transmitting the corresponding information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature H9. The first output means is another output means (mainly in the third embodiment) that outputs information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means by using one terminal provided in the external output terminal. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H8, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S2507 and S2508 of the side MPU 62).

According to the feature H9, it is possible to diversify the output mode when the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect execution means is externally output.

Feature H10. The gaming machine according to feature H9, wherein the separate output means is characterized in that the type of output information is different by differentiating the output duration of information using the one terminal.

According to the feature H10, even when the information is externally output using one terminal, it is possible to externally output a plurality of types of information according to the content of the effect.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features H1 to H10, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, and the features I1 to One or more of I8 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. The first control means (sound light side MPU82) and
A second control means (display side MPU92) that executes a predetermined process based on the control information transmitted by the first control means, and
External output means (external terminal board 79) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine,
An output executing means (in the second embodiment, a step in the sound / light side MPU 82) so that the control information or the corresponding information transmitted from the first control means is output to the outside of the gaming machine through the external output means. A function of executing the processing of S2206 and step S2216, a function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the sound / light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment), and
Equipped with
The communication method when information is output by the output executing means is the same as the communication method when the control information is transmitted between the first control means and the second control means. A game machine to play.

According to the feature I1, the information can be output to the outside by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information between the first control means and the second control means. Therefore, it is possible to output information externally while simplifying the processing configuration, and it is possible to preferably perform external output.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the first control means has the output executing means.

According to the feature I2, it is possible to output the information to the outside by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information in the first control means as it is. This makes it possible to output information externally while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature I3. The first control means executes a specific process based on predetermined control information transmitted by the third control means (main side MPU 62), and transmits information corresponding to the result of the specific process as the control information. The gaming machine according to feature I2, characterized in that it is.

According to the feature I3, the information corresponding to the result of the specific processing in the first control means is output to the outside of the gaming machine while the communication between the third control means and the first control means is not required for the external output. It becomes possible.

Feature I4. The third control means provides a specific side output means (a function of executing step S602, step S803, step S809, step S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62) to output information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature I3, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the feature I4, in the configuration in which the information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the third control means, the external output of the information corresponding to the result of a specific process is performed by the first control means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the main body of the external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform external output.

Feature I5. The third control means transmits the predetermined control information by a predetermined communication method.
The communication method when the control information is transmitted between the first control means and the second control means, and the communication method when the information is output by the output execution means are the predetermined communication methods. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, which is characterized by being different.

According to the feature I5, when the communication method is diversified, it is possible to output information to the outside while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature I6. The first control means controls the execution of the effect in the effect execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54), and when the predetermined effect (effect for gaming times) is executed, the control information is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that it is to be transmitted.

According to the feature I6, since the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect execution means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute the effect related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. .. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature I1, it is possible to externally output the information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature I7. The first control means transmits the control information by using a plurality of signal lines.
The output executing means according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the output executing means outputs information to the outside of the gaming machine by using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means. Gaming machine.

According to the feature I7, in a configuration that enables diversification of the types of control information, it is possible to make the types of externally output information correspond to them.

As a more specific configuration of the feature I7, "The first control means transmits the control information by one of the communication method of serial communication and parallel communication, and the output executing means is said. Information is output to the outside of the gaming machine by one of the communication methods. "

Feature I8. The first control means (sound light side MPU82) and
A second control means (display side MPU92) that executes a predetermined process based on the control information transmitted by the first control means, and
External output means (external terminal board 79) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine,
Output executing means (in the second embodiment, steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the control information transmitted from the first control means is output to the outside of the gaming machine through the external output means. A function to execute the process, in the third embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I8, the control information transmitted from the first control means is output as it is to the outside. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare information for external output exclusively, and it is possible to suitably perform external output.

For the configurations of features I1 to I8, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, and features H1 to Any one or more configurations of H10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature H group and the feature I group can solve the following problems.

For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine draws a lot based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions, and when the lottery result is a predetermined result, a transition to a winning state occurs. do. Further, as the winning / losing lottery mode, there is also known a gaming machine in which a plurality of modes such as a high probability mode and a low probability mode exist so that the probability of a predetermined winning result is relatively high or low. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting that the mode has a high probability of winning.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, for example, a winning / failing lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered a ball entry section provided in a game area, and if a winning result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery, a display device is used. It is known that a specific pattern combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device. It is also known that the mode of the winning / losing lottery shifts from one of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode to the other, for example, after the special gaming state ends. In the high-probability mode, for example, an effect different from that in the low-probability mode is executed on the display surface, or an operation different from that in the low-probability mode is executed in the movable member provided in the game area. As a result, the player plays the game while recognizing that the mode of the winning / failing lottery is the high probability mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, information is externally output in order to make the management computer of the gaming hall recognize the state of the gaming machine, but it is still improved in performing this external output appropriately. There is room.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Special electric winning device, 33 ... 1st operating port, 34 ... 2nd operating port, 41 ... Design display device, 51 ... Window unit, 53 ... Display light emitting unit, 54 ... Speaker unit, 62 ... Main Side MPU, 63 ... Main side ROM, 79 ... External terminal board, 82 ... Sound light side MPU, 83 ... Sound light side ROM, 92 ... Display side MPU, 301 ... External display device, EX ... External device.

Claims (1)

The first control means for executing the privilege lottery process of whether or not to grant the privilege to the player, and
When the privilege grant is won in the privilege lottery process, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player and the privilege granting means.
A second control means for executing an effect processing for executing an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, and
Equipped with
The first control means includes means for transmitting predetermined control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process.
The second control means is
The effect lottery execution means for executing the effect lottery process based on the reception of the predetermined control information, and the effect lottery execution means.
A means for executing the effect processing in a manner corresponding to the result of the effect lottery process so that the effect corresponding to the result of the effect lottery process can be executed.
Equipped with
The effect lottery execution means executes the effect lottery process so that a plurality of types of effect contents are subject to the lottery in the effect lottery process executed based on the specific predetermined control information.
The plurality of types of effect contents to be drawn in the effect lottery process executed based on the specific predetermined control information all include predetermined contents.
The first control means includes an external output means that outputs information corresponding to the predetermined control information to the outside of the gaming machine by using a predetermined terminal when a predetermined opportunity occurs.
The external output means includes means for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine by using the predetermined terminal when a specific trigger different from the predetermined trigger occurs.
While the predetermined control information includes information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, the information corresponding to the predetermined control information output to the outside by the external output means is the privilege lottery process. A gaming machine characterized in that the information corresponding to the result of is not included.

Images